JP7208629B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means.

Among such gaming machines, along with executing the variable display of the special symbols according to the determination result of the determination information, there was one that executed the variable performance by the performance symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-118109 A

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the game presentation, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means includes determination means for determining determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, and storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as pending storage. and variable display means for executing variable display of the special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means changes to a plurality of display modes as the variable display of the special symbols in one cycle. After the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times, the special symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop time , and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, It is possible to additionally display a reserved display according to an increase in reserved memory, shift display and decrease the reserved display according to a decrease in the reserved memory, and the length of the cycle period in the cycle fluctuation is less than the The additional display time when additionally displaying the pending display during the customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed is shorter, and the shift display of the pending display is performed after the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols is started. and the variable display of the effect symbols are started, and after the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the shift display of the pending display is completed , and the last cycle in the variable display of the special symbols. It is characterized in that the performance symbols are stop-displayed at the timing after the end of the variation and before the stop time of the special symbols elapses .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various storage areas of a main RAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. It is a figure which shows the main process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for a pending icon, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead continuous production|presentation determination process of a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect production scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing of an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialog announcement pattern determination table; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a character article notice pattern determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a blackout effect pattern determination table, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a back cut-in effect pattern determination table. (d) is a diagram showing an example of a determined effect pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fixed effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process of a lamp|ramp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial motion pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a frame role initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated while settings are being changed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirmation of settings; It is a figure which shows the specific example of the variable display of a special design with a special design indicator. It is a figure which shows the example of a display production|presentation for every production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the display production example of the number of reservations. It is a timing chart when the variable production starts from the customer waiting state. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 51; FIG. 52 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 51; It is a timing chart in the case of starting winning during the variable production. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 54; It is a timing chart in the case of continuously executing the variable effect. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 56; FIG. 57 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 56; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started without being able to receive the command at the time of stop normally. 60 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 59. FIG. It is a timing chart when the normal fluctuation performance ends and the customer waits. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 61; FIG. 62 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 61; It is a timing chart when the stop time command cannot be received normally and the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed. 65 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 64. FIG. It is a timing chart in the case of ending the losing normal reach fluctuation effect and entering a customer waiting state. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 66; FIG. 67 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 66; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends. 70 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 69. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 69. FIG. It is a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed. 73 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 72. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 72. FIG. It is a timing chart in the case of recovering from the power cut that occurred during the fluctuation production. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 75; FIG. 76 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 75; FIG. 76 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 75; It is a timing chart when the start time command cannot be received normally during the look-ahead effect. 80 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 79; FIG. 80 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 79; FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed; 83 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 82; FIG.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 made up of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95 (to be described later) are dispensed based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions. an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper plate 11 and flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later; A shooting operation device 13 is provided which can be operated to shoot the ball.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and produce sound (music, voice) effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like. It's like A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 is also provided with a notification LED 10a which is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality occurs such that game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (Fig. 1 or 2) function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a normal state and a normal state of the production button 17. A button driving device 17b equipped with a button driving motor for changing to a projecting state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner, and A production button light emission LED 17c is provided for changing the production button 17 between a light-off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined mode, so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.例文帳に追加

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the ball lending machine (not shown) installed side by side with the game machine 1 subtracts the remaining money stored in the storage medium and lends the game balls. When the return button 20b of the rental operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the occurrence of a plate full error when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path. While the full state is detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 5) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 are provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 (see FIG. 5) for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, and a game board. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3 so that the game board 5 can be accommodated from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the game machine 1 through this opening. .

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the shooting member, and a shooting device that tilts upward from the shooting member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping a game ball are provided at a launch position that is the inclined lower end of the launch rail. Then, the game ball sent to the shooting position by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is hit toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of the game ball into the inside. The left game area is divided into a left game area where the shot game balls flow down and a right game area where the game balls shot with a second projectile force stronger than the first projectile flow. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 , and the warp device 41 moves the interior of the decorative frame 40 below the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow downward.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win a prize (enter a ball) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, a game One general winning hole 43 in which a ball can always win a prize (enter a ball) is provided. When the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (granting conditions are satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. A payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting port 45 (first special symbol starting winning region) in which the game ball can always win (entering the ball). When the played game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). The ball is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and obliquely below the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a win is won in the hit determination described later). A variable starter 46 is provided which can be converted from a difficult closed state to an easy open state or a game ball winning state.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to serve as a flow path for game balls, and a second starting opening opening and closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction. A second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting opening opening/closing member 48, and a second opening that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting opening 47 By moving the start opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second start opening opening/closing member 48 forward (the prize winning regulation position), the second start opening 47 is closed and the second start opening is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 to the open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning position).

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 that is in the open state during the auxiliary game described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (granting conditions are established), A predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out to the upper tray 11 from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) as prize balls (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

In the right game area which is the right side of the decorative frame 40, a normal figure gate 44 (normal figure starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided, and a game ball that has passed the normal figure gate 44 is detected by a gate detection switch 44a. When detected in , the prize ball is not granted, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) of whether or not to execute the winning game is granted (general figure determination information described later is stored).

Under the general pattern gate 44, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination), a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) is possible or easy to open. A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted to a state is provided.

The first variable winning portion 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to serve as a flow path for game balls (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b is ), a first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a first big winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (entered) the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position) For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning position) to convert the first big winning opening 50 to the open state. A first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

When the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward during a jackpot game to be described later and the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 When the game ball flowing down or the game ball reaching the first big winning hole 50 enters the first big winning hole 50 and is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of Game balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 3).

Below the first variable prize winning section 49, it is possible or easy to win from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination). A second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted to an open state is provided.

The second variable winning portion 55 (second variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing), thereby forming a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). ), a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a second large winning opening opening/closing member 56 that opens upward directly below the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 (winning area). Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved forward (winning regulation position). As a result, the second large winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 is moved toward the rear (winning position) to convert the second large winning opening 56 to the open state. A second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 56 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 flows down. When the game ball that has been playing or the game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56 and is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 ) are paid out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 3).

The game ball launched into the left game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage section 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. Winning any of the three general prize winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or flowing into the out opening 39. Therefore, the normal figure gate 44 provided in the right game area, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning part 49 (first big winning part 50) and the second variable winning part 55 (second big winning part 56) winning ( pass).

In addition, the game ball shot to the right game area passes through the upstream flow path 91a, the central flow path 91b (general map gate 44), the left flow path 91c, the right flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the 2 downstream flow path 91f etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right game area, variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), Either the second variable winning section 55 (the second big winning opening 56 ) is won, or the money flows into the out opening 39 . Therefore, there is no chance of winning the general prize winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39 An out-ball flow path is provided for receiving and gathering out-balls made up of inflowing game balls to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. FIG.

Outside the game area 5a, there are a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61 and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63 and a second special symbol reservation device. A holding display device consisting of a display device 64 and a normal symbol holding display device 65, a main information display device 59 consisting of a round number display device 66, a right hitting display device 67 and a state confirmation display device 68 are provided. The main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically illuminated.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , The second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47 (entering the ball). The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol hit determination performed based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44 .

The jackpot determination is the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination Numerical value, random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display device 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is reported after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the first special symbol is performed. In addition, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are respectively composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting mode of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) in the variable display of each special symbol. do. When focusing on only one LED, it blinks at a cycle of 256 ms (32 ms on→224 ms off). Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big hit mode, losing mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means a state in which execution of a jackpot game (special game) is determined in the jackpot determination. The "jackpot game" is a round game in which the big winning holes (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) are changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined number of times ( For example, 4 times, 10 times, etc.), it means a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50, second big winning mouth 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the big winning hole, one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Auxiliary game determination is based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 (entrance ball), normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained general pattern determination information. It should be noted that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display device 62 performs normal symbol fluctuation display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the normal symbol variation display. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) for notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

It should be noted that the term "hit" in the present embodiment refers to a state in which it is determined that an auxiliary game (hitting game) is to be executed in the auxiliary game determination. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) win a prize (entering a ball), the auxiliary game (hitting game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbols are likely to be satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (hitting games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display device 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45. It is for displaying a certain first pending number (U1), and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first pending. It should be noted that although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. It should be noted that although up to four second reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four, and the second reservations may not be stored.

The normal pattern reservation display 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of normal pattern determination information (normal pattern reservation) stored when the game ball wins (passes) in the normal pattern gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of normal pattern reservations is stored up to 4, it may be less than or greater than 4, and the normal pattern reservations may not be stored.

Incidentally, the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be composed of 7-segment LEDs. For example, when it is judged as a big hit in the big hit judgment, numbers such as "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and when it is judged as a loss, "-" is stopped and displayed as a variable display. It is preferable to repeat turning off and "-" inside.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of six LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the user to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right-handed) during a jackpot state (special game) or a time-saving game state. It is for display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. Lighting of the LED is started, and the LED is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Since the state confirmation display 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the game machine in this way, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. . The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. can be displayed if possible. For example, the state confirmation display 68 may be illuminated in the setting change mode, and the state confirmation display 68 may be blinked in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation display device 64, the round number display device 66, right-handed indicators 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

Inside the game area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first holding display 83, a sub-second holding display 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal A sub information display 80 consisting of a drawing hold display 86 and a sub right hitting display 87 is provided. The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of an LED, and is dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display such as the status confirmation display 68 that indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, which will be described later.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the second sub-variation display 82 is for variably displaying the second special symbol. It is for displaying (announcing) whether or not it is inside, and each is configured by one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it lights up. do.

It should be noted that the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 may be used to notify the result of the special symbol jackpot determination. In this case, it is preferable that the LED is turned on in the case of a big win, and the LED is turned off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first pending display 83 is for displaying the number of first pending information (first pending number) described later, and the second sub-holding display 84 is for displaying the number of second pending information ( second pending number), each consisting of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation memories (normal pattern reservation number), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED turns off during the other game states.

A main display device 70 (first image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and is located in the lower part of the production space 40a and is the main display device. A sub-display device 71 (second image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display formed smaller in size and display area than the main display device 70 is provided in front of 70, and an operation display device 71 is provided above the rendering space 40a. A movable production device 73 is provided for executing production.

The main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 display various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demonstration effect performed while the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, and a variable display of the effect symbol 70a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols (pre-variation operation, update variation). There are a variation performance, a special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) variable display (update variation) performed during execution of the special symbol variation display, and a big win performance performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

Also, the sub-display device 71 can be moved by a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc. during execution of a variable effect on the main display device 70 to perform a moving effect. .

Specifically, it moves vertically (raises) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the main display device 70 and a production position (upper position) located near the center of the main display device 70. , descending) to perform a moving effect. In addition, it may be vertically swung at the standby position (lower position) or the effect position (upper position), or may be vertically swung at an intermediate position between the standby position and the effect position. . Further, the direction of movement of the sub-display device 71 (second image display device) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured such that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 .

The display unit (effective display area) of the main display device 70 (first image display device) includes a variable display area for displaying three production patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern), and a variable production pattern. A mode display area and the like are formed to indicate an effect mode to be executed.

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbols, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols. As the effect pattern 70a, patterns representing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The performance pattern 70a is stop-displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode (losing mode, jackpot mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the losing mode is other modes.

The variable display mode of the effect pattern 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be switched on the spot or rotated (rotated). good.

In addition, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 according to the result of the big hit determination. By doing so, the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game) is heightened.

The main display device 70 has a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons (first reserved information) corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the normal game state, which will be described later, and a Second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number (U2) in the time saving game state, and that the variable effect is being executed The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) shown, the first pending number display area SA for numerically displaying the first pending number (U1), and the second pending number (U2) A second reserved number display area SB and the like for displaying are formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. , and the fourth display portion 70B4 (fourth area), and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4. Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first suspension icon indicating the first suspension information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays the second A first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed in the third display portion 70B3, and the third display portion 70B3 is the first icon in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. A first pending icon indicating the pending information is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70B4 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left, a first display portion 70D1 (first area), a second display portion 70D2 (second area), a third display portion 70D3 (third area), a fourth display portion 70D4 ( 4th area), and the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4.

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays the second In the third display portion 70D3, a second holding icon indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70D3, the second special symbol in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. A second pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D. The icon is displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the first suspended icons displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B move toward the icon display area 70C one by one. By moving (shifting), the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (deletes) at the end of In other words, a disappearing effect (erasing effect) of the icon is performed.

Also, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the second suspended icon displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D moves one by one (shift ), and the second pending icon displayed in the first display unit 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the main display device 70 variably displays the effect pattern 70a. may be performed.

The movable effect device 73 has an operable first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b. By causing the movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute an action effect. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, so that it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the action effect. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a has a standby position (first position) located near the end (upper side) of the main display device 70 and an effect position located near the center (lower side) of the main display device 70. (second position) and moves (rises and descends). The second movable member 73b moves between a waiting position (first position) covering a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. . It should be noted that the first movable member 73a may be vertically swung at the standby position (first position) or the production position (second position), or may be vertically swung at an intermediate position between the standby position and the production position. You may make it rock|fluctuate. Further, instead of swinging the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73b is swung left and right while the first movable member 73a is in the standby position, the intermediate position, or the production position. It may appear that the member 73a is swinging.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A main control device 110A containing a game ball storage part 96 for storing balls and supplying them to a payout device 95, a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A containing a payout control board 120, and a performance control board 130 are built in. A performance control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) are provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, the display device (main display device, sub display device), and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10. A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the board illumination device 74).

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (jackpot and RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value (determined probability), setting key switch for inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key. 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic parts and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute setting. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values of values and performance information (see FIG. 42). Note that static lighting is performed when setting values are displayed, and dynamic lighting is performed when performance information is displayed.

(Structure of game board)
Next, referring to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5. FIG.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a rear unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5 .

The board unit 500 has a game board 500a made of transparent resin on which the game area 5a is formed on the surface by the inner rails 35 and the outer rails 36 described above, and a window is formed so that the rear can be viewed. .

And inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-described decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the normal figure gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), the variable Starting portion 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning port 50, first big winning port detection switch 50a, First big winning opening opening/closing member 51, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b), and second variable winning part 55 (second big winning opening 56, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, second big winning opening opening/closing A member 57, a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b), a sub-information display 80 are provided, and a main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a.

A certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 500a so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction about the left side. At the four corners of 500a, fixtures 503a for detachably attaching board unit 500 and back unit 501 are provided.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed by pinching the right side of the certificate stamp plate with the fingertips and rotating it leftward.

The fixture 503a includes an operation portion located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion and on the back side of the game board 500a. and an engaging piece positioned on the side thereof, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engagement posture) and a second state (engagement posture) by operating the operating portion. there is

The back unit 501 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front surface, and has a unit base 501a formed with a window that allows the rear side to be visually recognized. A production device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) and the like are provided, and a main display device 70 is provided behind the window. Also, an effect control device 130A is provided behind the main display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the effect control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving portions 503b are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixtures 503a.

When the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). A male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided in the right side of the back unit 501 . After that, when the rear surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the rear surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a enters the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to set the engagement pieces to the second state (engagement posture), the engagement pieces are engaged with the fixed receiving portions 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are connected. is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the rear unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened. Thereafter, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to bring the engaging pieces into the first state, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixing receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are withdrawn from the fixing receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the work of removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, the attachment and detachment of the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state in which the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the above.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the board unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when only the board unit 500 is to be replaced, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal work after opening the glass frame 4 .

(Overall block diagram of game machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the block diagram of the entire game machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls overall progress of the game (basic action), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. A board 120, an effect control board 130 for controlling a game-related effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board for supplying power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. 160 is provided.

In addition, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to transmit and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to transmit commands only in one direction to the board 130 .

The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports. It has 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start opening detection switch 45a, a second start opening detection switch 47a, and opening and closing of the second start opening. Solenoid 48b, 1st large winning opening detection switch 50a, 1st large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, 2nd large winning opening detecting switch 56a, 2nd large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, main Information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, right hitting display 67, state confirmation display 68), game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and effect control A substrate 130 is connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission and reception of various control commands. It performs control processing and the like for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

In the "game information", the starting opening winning signal output each time a game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A pattern confirmation signal output every time, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of the big winning opening), output over a time-saving game state described later and a security signal output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threat) in terms of security of the game machine 1 occurs.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b includes a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored. An unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored together with the above, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set. An area and an HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The game ROM area includes a game program area in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data relating to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the game machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the game machine. are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed are arranged in order. there is

The game RWM area consists of a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the game program is temporarily stored. A game stack area to be temporarily saved and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as a work area, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on an information program will be described. Describe relationships.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 95, and a switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage portion 96 of the above.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like (not shown).
The input/output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b, and launches the ball. When the detection signal from the volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is adjusted so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 balls/minute).

The production control board 130 is based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m and the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing for audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing for various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (such as motors) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m. It has

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output ports of the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, various input devices (detection switch etc.) according to the detection signal from control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m, controls the display of a predetermined image on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71, and outputs a predetermined voice or sound to the audio output device 9. control the

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. An image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and an audio output device based on the reception of audio control commands from the general control unit 141 9 and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, control processing for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140 and outputting it from the audio output device 9 It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing a sound effect and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b (effect button driving motor, effect button vibration motor), the effect button emission LED 17c, the movable effect device 73, the board lighting device 74, the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display A device 86 and a sub-right-handed display device 87) are connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. As a result, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the effect button emission LED 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable effect device 73, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Effect control board 130 and various electronic components) (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). It has a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped when the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value during output.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from the power failure (power failure), the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power failure (power failure). can be done.

In addition, although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control unit 130m. Also, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the effect control section 130m.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as states related to special game determination (jackpot determination), and a state related to the second start opening opening and closing member 48 of the second start port 47 "non-time saving state” and “time saving state”.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, "low-probability non-short-time gaming state (normal game state)" which is a low-probability state and non-time-saving state, "low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state)" which is a low-probability state and short-time state , A high probability state and a time saving state “high probability time saving game state (probability variable game state)” are provided.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to "normal game state". Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal game state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, the "low probability state" is, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the game is started at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. A game state in which the probability of a big hit is set as low as about 1/300 in a special game determination (jackpot determination) performed on the condition that a ball has entered the ball.

On the other hand, the "high probability state" means that when the set value is "1", the jackpot probability is set as high as about 1/60, which is advantageous to the player compared to the low probability state. state. It should be noted that the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state is performed after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, "non-time saving state" means that in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the probability of hitting is set as low as 1/256, and the average of the variable display of the normal pattern It refers to a game state in which the time is set to about 30 seconds and the opening time of the second starting port 47 in the case of winning is set to 0.180 seconds.

On the other hand, the "time-saving state" means that the probability of winning is set as high as 255/256, the average time of variable display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and the second start port 47 in the case of winning The opening time is set to 6 seconds, which is advantageous to the player in that the consumption of game balls is suppressed compared to the non-time-saving state. It should be noted that the shift from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the "time saving state" than the "non-working time saving state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the opening time of the second start port 47 and the winning probability are advantageous, but the average of the normal patterns Any one of the variation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability may be set to be advantageous.

Although the hit probability in the non-time saving state is 1/256, the hit probability may be set to 0/256 so as not to be determined as hit. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the non-time-saving state, and the game ball does not enter (win) the second starting port 47 .

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 6(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 (entering the ball). , FIG. 6B is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 (entering the ball). be.

As shown in FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b), the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random number for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, lose). As a reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of a "jackpot" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 6A or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for judgment, it is judged whether it is a "big win" or a "loss".

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The random number for judgment is judged to be a "jackpot". Then, a random value for judging a big win other than that judged to be a big win is judged to be "losing".

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 7(a) is a special symbol determination table for big hits for determining the type of special symbols when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 7(b) is a special symbol determination table when it is determined as a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for losing for determining the type.

As shown in FIGS. 7(a) and 7(b), the special symbol determination table includes types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, random numbers for special symbol determination, determination results of the special symbols, and corresponding determination results. Stop special figure data and the special design designation command which corresponds to the decision result are matched.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special pattern "01" is a special jackpot pattern for executing the first jackpot game, the special pattern "02" is a jackpot pattern for executing the second jackpot game, and the special pattern "11" is: It is a big winning pattern for executing the third big winning game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 6 times in which the first big prize winning port 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. ing. In addition, in the round game, even before the opening time elapses, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the first big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加Further, after the end of the first jackpot game, the low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times in which the first jackpot 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the second jackpot game is finished, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game is executed up to four times, in which the second big prize opening 56 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the end of the third jackpot game, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 7(a) to 7(b), and based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random number for special symbol determination, the type of special symbol, Stop special figure data and special design specification command are decided, special design specification command is transmitted to production control baseplate 130.

A first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7 is that the types of the big hit special symbols and the types of the losing special symbols are the same without changing depending on the setting values. By doing so, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind without making the game complicated.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 8(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state, and FIG. 8(b) is a special symbol variation pattern in the time saving state It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 8, the special figure variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) to be displayed, the big hit determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), and the reach determination A random number, a first reservation number (U1) or a second reservation number (U2), a random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, a special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, a special symbol fluctuation time, and a special figure It is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command that indicates a variation pattern.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stopped special figure data), the reach determination random number, the first reservation number (U1), or the second reservation Based on the number (U2), the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure variation pattern is determined, and the special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the production control board 130. there is

In addition, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a according to the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Since it is designed to do, the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8 describes the production contents that can be executed in the variable production as a reference.

"Normal variation", "shortened variation", "ultra-shortened variation", and "long variation" are shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , means to stop without reaching.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at "7" in the left area and the right area. , refers to a mode in which the remaining production patterns 70a are changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

"Normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. reach.

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects with a higher expectation of a big hit than normal reach, and are executed after normal reach. For example, the two production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to perform a special ready-to-win production.

In addition, "SPSP reach" is a special reach performance with a higher expectation of a big hit than super reach, and is executed after super reach. For example, the three production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to perform a special reach production than "SP reach". ing.

Also, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that determines a big hit, and is executed after the normal reach. For example, the main display device 70 blacks out from the normal reach production, and then the three production patterns 70a are all the same and fluctuate at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to display "SPSP reach". It is designed to perform a special reach production than ”.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the type of the special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

(Advance judgment table)
Figure 9 (a) is a pre-determination table for the non-time-saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 during the non-time-saving state , FIG. 9(b) is a pre-determination table for the time saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pre-determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number. , Toku-zu scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the toku-zu scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 9, and based on the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special symbol, the random number for judging the reach, and the random number for judging the special figure fluctuation pattern, the special figure scheduled fluctuation. A pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 10(a) is a special figure in which the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (enters) in the first start port 45 and/or the second start port 47 is stored. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a determination information storage area, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area, FIG. It is a general pattern determination information storage area in which normal pattern determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the special figure determination information storage area stores special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45. First special figure determination information holding storage A second special figure determination information holding storage area for storing special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are each divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. They correspond to the portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4, respectively. Also, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area are the first display unit 70D1, the second display unit 70D2 of the second holding icon display area 70D, They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (first reservation information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area is the first number of reservations (U1), these special figure determination The number of first pending icons corresponding to the information is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of special figure determination information (second reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information is the second number of reservations (U2), corresponding to these determination information A number of suspended icons are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second suspended icon display area 70D.

Moreover, the 0th memory|storage part which is a special figure determination information execution memory|storage area corresponds to the said icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball wins (entrance) to the first start port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in a storage unit with a small number. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest number in which the special figure determination information is not stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is a special figure determination information execution storage area, is a special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. will be referenced to execute the

As shown in FIG. 10(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area is a normal pattern determination information storage area in which the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 is stored. It is divided into a general pattern determination information storage area in which the general pattern determination information being displayed is stored, and the general pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively. In addition, the number of general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information reservation storage area is the number of general pattern determination information.

As shown in FIG. 10(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for storing the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. Normal figure determination information is stored.

The 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. It will be referred to for executing the variable display of normal symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, processing for preparing for starting control of the game, processing for initial operation of various driving sources of the board unit 500, and the like are performed. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power cut-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that power cut-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in a payout control process of timer interruption, which will be described later, and a command specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (restored power supply) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62 prohibits RWM access, After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S17 assuming that the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the step is regarded as the first power-on or irregular power restoration. The process is moved to S18.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the setting value (probability of judging a big hit in judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is performed. Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first power-on or the above-described irregular power recovery, and the process proceeds to step S22. will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If determined to be within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if determined to be out of the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (game program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

The "notification of unrecoverable error" means displaying an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the main display device 70 recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. Illuminating the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or displaying a non-recoverable error from the audio output device 9 indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred. It is possible to output a possible error sound ("This is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S31. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on for making the main display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the voice output device 9 notifies that the RWM area has been initialized. power-on notification sound ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In addition, when the power is turned on, instead of displaying the initial screen on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71, the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71 are displayed to notify that the RWM area has been cleared. You may do so.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process for displaying on the information display 113 the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area is performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (0 clearing) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Power restoration notification" means that a power restoration screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or a frame The display lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the voice output device 9 indicates that the power supply has been restored (from a power failure). power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S30. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the main display device 70 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S31. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S32, and permits all interrupts in step S33 to control the progress of the game (main control). A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initialization process is finished.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. , cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. This eliminates the inconvenience caused to the game parlor and the player, and improves the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game arcade is set. Become.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the lighting device 10 for the disc or the lighting device 74 for the disc, and to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back side (back side). It is possible. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing. .

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a outputs a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting change, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting change is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S19-2, the state confirmation display 68 displays a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, the game clerk can confirm that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

"Setting change notification" means displaying a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or setting the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74. This is a notification that all lights are lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the change. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk can recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. Become.

The main CPU 110a acquires the setting value from the setting value area in step S19-4, and determines whether or not the acquired setting value is within the appropriate range (1 to 4) in step S19-5. If determined to be within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S19-7, and if determined to be out of the proper range, the obtained set value is updated to "1" in step S19-6.

The main CPU 110a displays the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-7. Specifically, the obtained setting values (1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. FIG. As a result, the game clerk can confirm the setting value before the change by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a set value update operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-9, and if there is no set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-12.

The main CPU 110a updates the obtained set value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs set value correction processing in step S19-10. Specifically, when the acquired set value is "5", the acquired set value is corrected to "1".

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-11. Specifically, the acquired setting values (1 to 4) after updating are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to check the information display 113 to grasp the set value before confirmation.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S19-12. Specifically, various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first A process for initializing the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the setting change mode ends is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an operation to confirm the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a set value confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S19-14 assuming that the set value is confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no set value confirmation operation, the set value is updated. Assuming that there is a possibility that the

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a saves the updated acquired setting value in the setting value area. In step S19-15, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 ends. The display of the status confirmation display 68 is ended.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S19-18. Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources when the setting change mode is terminated by the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change processing.

In this way, even if the setting value is out of the proper range, the initial value is set as the setting value, so that an indeterminate value is set as the setting value and the gaming machine unexpectedly malfunctions. It is possible to prevent the game shop and the player from being troubled by the action, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, during the setting change (during the setting change mode), the game clerk, on the front (surface) of the game machine 1, displays the state confirmation display 68, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the lighting device 10 for the frame, and the board. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the lighting device 74 for the display, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the rear surface (back side). That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the game machine 1 .

Although the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, the set value confirmation operation may be performed by turning the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state, or by turning the dedicated switch OFF. Alternatively, the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. , the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. It may be set to ON state.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the main display device 70 displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". This is a notification such as outputting voice over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first Processing is performed to initially operate the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process proceeds to step S24-2. transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources when the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated by the RWM clear approval operation, and terminates the current RWM clear process.

Although the RWM clear preparation designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the RWM clear processing ends, the RWM clear designation command is transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. You may make it In this case, the RWM clear specification command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear processing, or may be transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation processing)
A setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S27-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting confirmation is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. FIG. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to confirm that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S27-3. As a result, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

"Setting confirmation notification" means displaying a setting confirmation screen indicating that settings are being confirmed on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or displaying a setting confirmation screen for the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74. This is a notification that all the LEDs are lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) over the entire period. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming the setting value") indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, the game clerk can recognize that the settings are being confirmed by checking the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the voice output device 9. Become.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S27-4. Specifically, the set value in the set value (in-game) area is referenced, and a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to grasp the current set value by checking the information display device 113 .

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S27-5. Specifically, various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first Processing is performed to initially operate the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the setting confirmation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various driving sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

In step S27-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process proceeds to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends the display of the set values on the information display 113 in step S27-7, ends the display of the status confirmation display 68 in step S27-8, and ends the confirmation operation in step S27-9. When the setting confirmation mode is terminated by , a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources is performed, and the current setting confirmation process is terminated.

It should be noted that the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting confirmation processing, and the power recovery designation command is transmitted after the setting confirmation processing is completed, but instead of the setting confirmation designation command, the setting confirmation start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power restoration designation command. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting checking signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, from the start of power supply to the game ready state where the game progress control (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), input other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a Device (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening The presence or absence of signal input from the detection switch 56a, the magnetic detection sensor 57a, and the radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if game balls enter various prize winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalidated and the game balls are not paid out. It's like Also, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning becomes invalid and the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. No display is performed, and the jackpot game is not executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the passage is invalidated and the normal pattern display device 62 does not variably display the normal patterns, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play the game before the progress control of the game is started.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, error notification is not performed even if various errors occur. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that cheating is performed before the game progress control is started.

The setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110 .

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). , and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing (game program). Specifically, the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special pattern, the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for judging the normal pattern, and the random number for judging the regular pattern fluctuation pattern are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by +1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The initial random value to be used is set as a new cycle initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number update processing (game program). Specifically, similar to step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as , and sets predetermined data if there is an input. Details of the input control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program) in step S300. Specifically, determination of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the fluctuation display of the first special design or the second special design, the big winning opening Processing such as opening/closing (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) and setting of the game state is performed. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general/universal electric power control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of acquired general pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the general pattern gate 44, normal symbol fluctuation display, opening and closing of the second start port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing (game program) in step S500. Specifically, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

The main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing (game program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as game balls winning in the second start port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, game balls winning in the big winning port when not in the special game, various winning Abnormal prize-winning error where the number of game balls that have won a prize does not match the number of game balls discharged from the prize-winning ball flow path, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error in which an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period of time, a door open error in which the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a during game progress control. or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is generated, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes processing for performing error notification.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (game program) in step S700. Specifically, the external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second big winning Special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display device 62, third 1 special design reservation display 63, special design reservation display data to be output to second special design reservation display 64, normal design reservation display data to be output to normal design reservation display 65, and other data are created.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the start opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol Display output processing for outputting signals such as pending display data and normal symbol pending display data, and sending a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize described later Sphere counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) are referred to, and processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 is performed. . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during normal gaming state, out during normal gaming state For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values). By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it is possible to make use of this in grasping the performance of the game machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

Note that the game section is first updated when the total number of outs during the normal game state reaches 300, and thereafter updated each time the total number of outs during the normal game state reaches 60,000. , the base storage area includes a first area for storing the normal base value for the current game interval, a second area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval, and a second area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval. A third area for storing the normal base value and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the game interval three times before are provided, and the normal base value for the four game intervals including the current one are provided. will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data. Details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, and during the setting confirmation mode) before the progress control of the game is started, the timer interruption is not executed. Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and pays out the prize balls from the payout device 95. process.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball wins the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56 It is determined whether or not the game has been played, and processing for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, the process for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the general pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing the general pattern determination information I do. When this process ends, the current input control process ends.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first start opening detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for the 3-ball prize by adding the data indicating the 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, determines the special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is less than four in step S230-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start port detection switch input process exit.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). The corresponding first special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the main display device 70.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S230-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a non-time-saving state (normal game state). If it is in a non-time-saving state, the processing is moved to step S230-9 as a pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, and it is not in a non-time-saving state In this case, the current first start opening detection switch input process is terminated as not performing the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 .

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first pre-reading process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 9 is referred to, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is pre-determined before the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the pre-determination (special figure Scheduled variation pattern) to generate a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 is performed.

Since this "first look-ahead specified command" is information that can specify the special figure scheduled variation pattern, the effect control board 130 uses the first look-ahead specified command to determine the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, and the special symbol. The type can also be specified.

At step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command generated at step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the jackpot game is played over one or a plurality of variation displays from before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command. is executed.

As for the second starting hole detection switch input process, the same process as the first starting hole detection switch input process is performed. ), 1st special figure determination information reservation storage area, non-time saving state, 1st look-ahead processing, 1st look-ahead designation command part, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 2 ball counters, 2nd number of reservations (U2 ), second special figure determination information reservation storage area, time saving state, second look-ahead processing, second look-ahead designation command.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first pending number (U1) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reserved number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reservation information may not be stored by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special figure determination information storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the second pending number (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Also, the upper limit value of the second reserved number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reserved storage may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reservation storage (special figure judgment information), the fluctuation time is set, and the command at the start (special Design storage designation command, game state designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130 processing and processing to change the special figure special electric processing data to "1" etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for the purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time, the stop time (for example 0.5 seconds) is set, and the command at the time of stop (symbol confirmation command) is produced Control board 130, special symbol variation processing (step S320) for performing processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "2", and the like.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, by the lapse of the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds), if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a big hit special symbol, it is a big hit. A game opening time is set, a process for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130, and a special symbol stop process (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric process data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process for starting the round game by the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game and transmitting the round designation command to the production control board 130 and the big hit game based on the end of the final round game (Step S340) for setting the ending time and transmitting the ending designation command to the effect control board 130, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. (step S340) .

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing to end the jackpot game by the passage of the ending time and the game state after the jackpot (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number, time-saving number ), a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and the like (step S350).

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second pending number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

The main CPU 110a updates the second reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and designates special symbol storage corresponding to the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores the command in the second special figure determination information storage area. Shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after subtraction. is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. set to As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the second hold number is shifted to the first hold However, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (the first number of reservations may be It may be subtracted with priority over the second reservation number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Determine whether or not In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and the special symbol to be stopped Perform processing to determine the type of

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to determine the special figure variation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 should be switched. It is determined whether or not the switching time counter is the display switching value "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step 850-2. , the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not changed. It should be noted that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S850-4.If the lighting confirmed flag has not been saved, the information is displayed. The process moves to step S850-3 to check whether the device 113 is lit. When this process is executed for the first time after the game machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all the segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area in step S850-6. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above display switching time counter in step S850-7, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds) in step S850-8. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has passed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is the lighting confirmed flag in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above data selection counter in step S850-12, and determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 3) in step S85-13. If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the above-described game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is terminated.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is out of order and which segment is out of order.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 22, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 flashes "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

Also, by the out ball detection switch 39a, the game ball that has won the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the out hole 39 Instead of detecting out-balls made up of game balls that have flowed into the outlet, only game balls that have flowed into the out-port may be detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a. In that case, out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch The number of outs (the number of total outs, the number of normal outs) should be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected at 56a.

(Main processing of production control section)
Main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart of main processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a inhibits all interrupts in step E1, performs CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted at step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 130m. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed in a customer waiting state in which a special symbol variable display or a special game (jackpot game) is not executed, and the customer waiting time has passed. Processing for executing a customer waiting performance for stimulating the player's willingness to play is performed based on what has been done.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot announcement effect execution process. Specifically, based on the execution information of the jackpot prediction effect set in the sub-RAM 130c in the jackpot prediction effect determination process to be described later, the degree of expectation for the execution of the jackpot game is suggested (the ) Perform processing for executing a jackpot announcement effect.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a win-time lighting effect execution process. Specifically, it suggests the degree of expectation that a big win game will be executed based on the execution information of the light emission effect at the time of winning set in the sub RAM 130c in the light emission effect determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later. Expected) processing for executing the lighting effect at the time of winning.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the update conditions (game state change, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach performance where the result is lost, etc.) is established, and if the update condition is established, the production mode is set to any one of a plurality of production modes. Perform processing to update to .

"Production mode" is production mode A to C set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), production mode D to E set in the probability variable game state (high probability short-time game state), and time saving There is provided an effect mode F that is set in the game state (low-probability short-time game state). It should be noted that when the power is turned on and the normal game state is controlled (for example, after changing the settings, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the settings, etc.), the effect mode that is set first is always the effect mode A, and the power is turned on. The performance mode that is set first when controlled to the variable probability game state at the time of ON is always the performance mode D, and the performance mode that is first set when controlled to the time-saving game state at the time of power ON. is always in production mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 is performed.

At step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c at step E100, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
Command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing in step E305. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. In the case of , a process of setting a notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, processing for executing power-on notification or power recovery notification, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable An initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, and the like are performed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error system designation command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error type designation command" includes unrecoverable error designation command, illegal winning error designation command, abnormal winning error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door open error start designation command, door open error end designation command, operation error designation command, tray full error designation command, delivery abnormality designation command, etc. are included. The order of priority of each error is as follows: payout error = tray full error < operation error < door open error < radio wave error = magnetic error < abnormal winning error = fraudulent winning error < unrecoverable error.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of error designation command received (non-recoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification , plate full error notification, dispensation abnormality notification, etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. Note that various error notifications are performed using at least one of error sound output, lamp error light emission, and error image display. Specifically, in the full tray error notification, the lamp does not emit an error light, and in the dispensing abnormality notification, no error sound is output. All of the image display is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, the process of setting the effect instruction command for updating the number of reserved special figures stored in the sub RAM 130c and increasing or decreasing the reserved icon displayed on the main display device 70 to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c I do. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the pending icons displayed on the main display device 70 is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a prefetch designation command. If it is a prefetching designation command, the received prefetching designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is set in the later-described prefetching storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and then the process is moved to step E315, and if it is not a prefetching designation command, Processing is transferred to step E318.

The "prefetching storage area" is a first prefetching storage unit for sequentially storing prefetching information (such as a special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) based on the first prefetching designation command, and a second prefetching designation command. and a second prefetch storage unit for storing prefetch information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) being executed (0th storage unit). The two prefetch storage units are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described first special figure determination information reservation storage area, and when the first prefetch designation command is received, the Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to one pending number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and when the second prefetch designation command is received, the 2 Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the special figure determination information execution storage area described above, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit The prefetch information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the prefetch information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second prefetch unit is stored. be.

In step E315, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing. Specifically, the degree of expectation ( A process for determining whether or not to execute an icon change effect suggesting a possibility), the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed, etc. is performed. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a win-time lighting effect determination process. Specifically, a special game is played by causing the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode when the game ball enters the starting hole. A process for determining whether or not to execute a prize-winning light-emitting effect suggesting the degree of expectation that is executed, and the effect mode of the prize-winning light-emitting effect to be executed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, it is expected that the big win game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that the big win game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the read-ahead continuous effect, the type of the read-ahead continuous effect to be executed is determined, and the processing of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c for executing the read-ahead continuous effect is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead continuous effect determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special design designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special design designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, a process for determining the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display device 70 as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, etc. is performed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command in step E320. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E325.

In step E321, the sub CPU 130a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the special figure variation pattern designation command received, the variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the main display device 70, is determined and the variable performance pattern is indicated. A process of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot announcement performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Alternatively, the process of determining the effect mode (pattern) of the big win notice effect to be executed and setting the execution information of the big win notice effect in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. The details of the jackpot announcement effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or changing the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the icon is performed.

In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect execution process. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous effect determined in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 or changing the effect mode to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a pattern confirmation command (stop command). If it is a pattern confirmation command (stop command), the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command (stop command), the process moves to step E327.

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporarily stopped state to end the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, this command analysis process is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes an opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game effect determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, the processing of setting the performance designation command for determining the opening performance of the jackpot game and executing the opening performance in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the round designation command, , a process of determining a round effect of the round game and setting an effect instruction command for executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the ending specifying command, the ending effect of the jackpot game is determined. Then, the command for executing the ending effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is finished. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current icon change rendering is executable. If it is during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-3, and if it is not during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

"Icon change effect executable period" means that the jackpot game is not being executed, and when the first look-ahead designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, in a non-time-saving state (normal game state) There is a time saving state (probability variable game state or time saving game state) when receiving a second look-ahead designation command based on winning a prize to the second start port 47, and the like.

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the pre-reservation (reservation storage corresponding to the previously received pre-reading designation command), that is, whether or not the change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. determine whether If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), and step E315-5. , an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 27) for determining the final display mode of the icon is selected. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E315-6. Specifically, with reference to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from the final display modes.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of blue icon, red icon, and rainbow icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 28) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the final disappearance of the icon.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 28, based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of pending memories of the special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, One change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon first displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), from the determined change scenario, and determines the winning icon. icon display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or a predetermined A sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or a predetermined A sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the preceding hold. The icon change effect may be executed when the action is not to be performed, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the ready-to-win effect is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, even if the advance hold includes the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but if the advance hold does not include the reach effect, the reach effect The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) than in the case of including the Also, if the precedence hold does not include a specific reach effect (SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect), the icon change is more likely than the case that includes a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, etc.) The effect may be easily executed (executed at a high rate), or vice versa.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 27 is an icon final display mode determination table for determining the icon final display mode in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The icon final display mode determination table contains the type of special symbol corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected. Display modes are associated with each other, and as a reference, the effect contents of the planned variation pattern corresponding to the prefetch designation command are described.

The final icon display mode includes a normal icon (a white icon whose shape is set for each production mode) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for a big win, and a special icon that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win (common to multiple production modes). shape (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) is set. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win related to the special icon is higher in the order of blue icon<red icon (SP reach or higher confirmed)<rainbow icon (big win confirmed).

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 28 is a change scenario determination table for determining an icon change scenario in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated. The advance change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether it is in the normal game state (first special symbol icon) or in the specific game state (second special symbol icon). In the case of the state (icon of the second special symbol), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to the prior change (for example, 20:80, 0:100, etc.). may In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is set to be higher in the specific game state (second special symbol icon) than in the normal game state (first special symbol icon). may

(Change pattern determination table)
FIG. 29 is a change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the pending/corresponding icon in the icon display mode update process of step E323 described above.

FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a suspended icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern of a suspended icon, and FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon referred to when determining .

The change pattern determination table corresponds to the mode of suspension/relevant icon change in the current variable effect, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate of each suspension/relevant icon change pattern, and the type of selected deferment/relevant icon change pattern. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the hold/relevant icon in each hold/relevant icon change pattern are described.

The hold/relevant icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect, and a character A displayed on the main display device 70 that triggers the change of the hold/relevant icon. A character A action change pattern in which a trigger effect is performed to change the display mode of the hold/relevant icon, and a trigger effect to trigger the change in the hold/relevant icon by the character B displayed on the main display device 70 are performed. A character B action change pattern in which the display mode of the icon is changed and the character C displayed on the main display device 70 perform a trigger effect that triggers the change of the icon, thereby changing the display mode of the icon. A character C action change pattern and a character D action change pattern in which a character D displayed on a main display device 70 performs a trigger performance that triggers a change of the icon to change the display mode of the icon is set. .

The change timing of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable production, and is classified into the production period before the reach that is executed at the beginning of the fluctuation production. During normal reach and after normal reach, which are classified into reach production periods that may be executed after.

As a change mode of the pending icon, "1UP" means that the expected jackpot level changes to a display mode that is one step higher, such as changing a white icon to a blue icon or a blue icon to a red icon. means that “2UP” means that the expectation of a big win changes to a display mode that is two levels higher, for example, a white icon changes to a red icon or a blue icon changes to a rainbow icon. Further, "SP suggestive" means that a suggestive effect suggesting that the SP ready-to-win effect will be executed by the character that has performed the opportunity effect is executed.

As a first feature related to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, in the normal reach fluctuation production in which the expectation of the big hit is lower than the SP reach fluctuation production, the icon change production (prediction) is targeted for this normal reach fluctuation production. The expectation of a big hit is higher when the icon change effect (prediction effect) targeting this normal reach variation effect is executed than when the effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation of whether or not the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect) will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature related to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. Also, the ratio of executing the normal reach fluctuation effect after the icon change effect is executed is higher than the ratio of executing the normal reach fluctuation effect after the icon change effect is executed. The ratio of execution of the SP reach performance is higher, and the ratio of execution of the SP reach performance after the icon change performance is executed is higher than the ratio of execution of the SP reach fluctuation performance after the icon change performance is executed. When the jackpot game is not executed, the ratio of executing the SP reach fluctuation performance after the icon change performance is executed is higher than the ratio of executing the normal reach fluctuation performance after the icon change performance is executed. is lower, and the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win effect after the icon changing effect is executed is lower than the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win effect after the icon changing effect is executed. be done. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation of whether or not the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect) will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature relating to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. In this case, the icon change effect is executed (easily) at a high rate. By doing so, the ready-to-win effect and the icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that when the SP reach variation effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during normal reach than after normal reach (during SP reach effect, during SPSP reach effect) ( However, the icon change effect may not be executed after normal reach.

As a fourth feature relating to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. In this case, the pending icon change effect is executed (easier to occur) at a higher rate. By doing so, the ready-to-win effect and the pending icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that when the SP reach variation effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during normal reach than after normal reach (during SP reach effect, during SPSP reach effect) ( However, the icon change effect may not be executed after normal reach.

As a fifth feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. There are different points depending on the content of the change (character A for white→blue, character B for blue→red). By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestive effect is to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. Different depending on the content of the change (character A for white→blue, character B for blue→red, character C for white→red, and character D for blue→rainbow). be done. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestive effect is to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A seventh feature relating to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 is that when the icon changes to a red icon, an SP ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. However, if the icon is a red icon, the SP ready-to-win effect can be executed regardless of whether the suggestion effect (SP suggestion) is executed or not. points. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the player's delight at the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Look-ahead continuous effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The look-ahead continuous effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E317-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is moved to step E317-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current prefetching continuous effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

At step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present time is the period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed. If it is during the look-ahead zone effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-4, and if it is not the look-ahead zone effect executable period, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-6.

"Prefetching Zone Effect" refers to effecting during zone over one or more variable effects (display of prefetching zone background image, display of blue zone image or red heat zone image, output of zone BGM or heat zone BGM). This is an effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by a background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of look-ahead continuous effect.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead zone effect'' includes, for example, when there is no precedent reservation in which the look-ahead zone effect is executed, and when the jackpot game is not in progress. In addition, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal game state, and the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed in a state other than the normal game state. A zone production may be made executable.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 31) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone effect. Details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 31, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), and the selection rate of each notice scenario Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is during which the look-ahead effect presentation can be executed. If it is during the look-ahead effect rendering executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-9, and if it is not during the look-ahead effect rendering executable period, it is determined that the look-ahead effect rendering based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead effect production" means that a special game is executed by executing an effect production (displaying an effect image around the production pattern 70a that starts the variable display, outputting an effect sound) over one or more variable productions. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation to be made by effect images and sound information, and is a kind of look-ahead continuous production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead effect production" includes, for example, that there is no pre-reading effect production to be executed in the preceding reservation, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and the like. In addition, it is possible to make the look-ahead effect production executable in the normal game state and make the look-ahead effect production impossible in other than the normal game state, or make the look-ahead effect production impossible in the normal game state and make the look-ahead effect production in the normal game state non-executable. Effect production may be made executable.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead effect rendering scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining a look-ahead effect rendering scenario. Details of the look-ahead effect rendering scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead effect production scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each production scenario Based on (%), one look-ahead effect presentation scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead effect presentation scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead effect rendering as the rendering scenario in which the look-ahead effect rendering is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead effect presentation scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead effect presentation scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous presentation execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead effect presentation is performed. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous effect determination process ends.

(Look-ahead Zone Production Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 described above.

In the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production scenario for each look-ahead zone production, and the look-ahead to be selected Effect scenarios of zone effects are associated with each other, and for reference, advance variations in each effect scenario and effect modes of look-ahead zone effects in the changes are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" is the execution of normal effects during the zone (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM). This means that a heat zone middle effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of a heat zone BGM) with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the effect is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, and a scenario in which the zone effect is executed during the change without executing the zone effect during the preliminary change ( For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. The point is that an effect scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to an effect mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the effect mode of the effect in the zone progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 31 is that the effect state of the look-ahead zone effect progresses (changes) more easily with the change than with the advance change. By doing so, it is possible to easily maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to the climax in the fluctuation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the advance variation may make it easier for the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation to progress (develop) than the variation.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario determination table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect presentation scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead effect presentation scenario in the look-ahead continuous presentation determination process of step E317 described above.

In the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production scenario for each look-ahead effect production, and the look-ahead to be selected Effect production scenarios are associated with each other, and for reference, advance variations in each production scenario and the production mode of the look-ahead effect production in the variations are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Blue effect" means that a blue effect image is displayed around the production design 70a and a blue effect sound is output, and "red effect" means that a blue effect is produced around the production design 70a. To display a red effect image with a higher expectation for a big hit than the image and to output a red effect sound.

The look-ahead effect production scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead effect production is not executed, and a scenario in which the effect production is executed during the fluctuation without executing the effect production during the preliminary fluctuation (for example, , scenario 01), and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an effect production is executed during the prior variation and during the variation.

The first feature of the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table shown in FIG. The point is that an effect scenario is set that progresses (changes) to an effect mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the presentation mode of the effect presentation will progress (change), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead effect presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the presentation state of the look-ahead effect presentation progresses (changes) more easily with the variation than with the advance variation. By doing so, it is possible to easily maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to the climax in the fluctuation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the advance variation may make it easier for the presentation mode of the look-ahead effect presentation to progress (develop) than the variation.

In addition, as a production mode of the look-ahead effect production, a type of effect (for example, rainbow effect) that confirms the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, or a type of effect that has a lower expectation of big win than the blue effect (for example, white effect ) may be provided.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 33, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a big-hit announcement effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E322-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern executed in the current variable effect, and in step E322-2, the notice pattern of the dialogue notice effect to be executed during the pre-reach effect period (during normal fluctuation). A dialog announcement pattern is determined using a dialog announcement effect determination table (see FIG. 34) for determining . Specifically, with reference to the dialog announcement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34, the dialog announcement pattern is determined based on the big hit determination result, the current variation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialog announcement pattern.

``Dialogue announcement effect'' indicates the degree of expectation for a big win on the main display device 70 in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period (for example, 3 seconds) that occurs during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation). This is a type of big hit announcement effect in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9. - 特許庁It should be noted that the dialogue announcement effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the effective period, and is executed when the effective period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is designed to be

In step E322-3, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the dialogue announcement effect corresponding to the dialogue announcement pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of the dialogue advance notice effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution processing of step E500, and the dialogue notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the character product announcement pattern determination table (see FIG. 35(a)) for determining the announcement pattern of the character product announcement effect to be executed during the pre-reach effect period (during normal fluctuation). is used to determine the character product announcement pattern. Specifically, with reference to the character product announcement pattern determination table shown in FIG. determine the pattern.

The "role item announcement effect" means that the first movable member 73a performs a predetermined operation (a small descent or a large descent described later) at a predetermined timing during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation) to increase the expectation of a big hit. It is one of the suggested jackpot foreshadowing productions.

In step E322-5, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for the role product announcement effect corresponding to the role product announcement pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this character product announcement effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the role product announcement effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the role product announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a blackout effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable effect pattern in which a reach effect equal to or greater than the normal reach is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute a blackout effect, the process proceeds to step E322-7, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute a blackout effect, it is determined that the blackout effect is not executed, and step E322. -9 is processed.

In step E322-7, the sub CPU 130a uses the blackout effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 35(b)) for determining the effect pattern of the blackout effect to be executed during the reach effect period (normal reach). Determine an out production pattern. Specifically, referring to the blackout effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. determine the pattern.

"Blackout effect" means that the main display device 70 turns dark during the ready-to-win effect period (normal reach), and the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (for example, 2 seconds) that occurs during the darkening period. , is a kind of jackpot announcement effect in which a development effect is executed to suggest whether or not it will develop into an SP ready-to-win effect. Note that the blackout effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the effective period, and is executed when the effective period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is designed to be

In step E322-8, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for the blackout effect corresponding to the blackout effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this blackout effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the blackout effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the blackout effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing the back cut-in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable effect pattern in which the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a back cut-in performance, the process is shifted to step E322-10, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a back cut-in performance, the back cut-in performance is not executed. Then, the process is moved to step E322-12.

In step E322-10, the sub CPU 130a uses the back cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 35(c)) for determining the effect pattern of the back cut-in effect to be executed during the SP ready-to-win effect. Determines the in effect pattern. Specifically, referring to the back cut-in production pattern determination table shown in FIG. A cut-in effect pattern is determined.

The "back cut-in effect" is a development suggestion that suggests whether or not to develop into SPSP reach effect in response to operation of effect button 17 during an effective period (for example, 1 second) that occurs during SP reach effect. It is a kind of jackpot announcement production in which the production is executed. Note that the back cut-in effect is a special button operation effect in which the promotion effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 17 is not executed during the effective period, and is not executed when the effect button 17 is not operated. there is

In step E322-11, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for the back cut-in effect corresponding to the back cut-in effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The back cut-in effect execution information is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the back cut-in effect is executed. Details of the back cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable effect pattern in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E322-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute a fixed effect, the process proceeds to step E322-15 assuming that the fixed effect is not executed. transfer processing.

In step E322-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a determined effect pattern using a determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 35(d)) for determining the effect pattern of the determined effect to be executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. . Specifically, referring to the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35(d), the determined effect pattern is determined based on the big hit determination result, the current variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern. do.

"Determined effect" is a result of suggesting (notifying) whether or not a jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period (for example, 4 seconds) that occurs during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. It is a kind of jackpot announcement production in which a suggestive production is executed. Note that the decision effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the effective period, and is executed when the effective period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It has become so. In addition, the decision production is not performed only during the SPSP reach production, but may be carried out during the normal reach production, the SP reach production, etc. In that case, the normal reach production <SP reach production <SPSP reach production is performed in this order. It is preferable to increase the execution ratio of the determined effect.

In addition, for the final effect, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are lowered to the effect position (large descent described later), and the second movable member 73b is moved in the left-right direction. When the board illumination device 74, the effect button light-emitting LED, etc. emit rainbow colors and a success image (an image including rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, the determination suggests that a jackpot game will be executed. A jackpot game is executed by displaying a success performance and a failure image (image not including rainbow color) on the main display device 70 without the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descending to the performance position. There is a decided failure production that suggests that it will not be done.

In step E322-14, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for a determined effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this determined effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the determined effect is executed. The details of the determined effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the process is shifted to step E322-16, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the current jackpot announcement performance is performed assuming that the fixed performance is not executed. End decision processing.

In step E322-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a confirmed effect pattern using a confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36) for determining the effect pattern of the confirmed effect to be executed at a predetermined timing during the variable effect. . Specifically, referring to the definite pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36, the definite effect pattern is determined based on the big hit determination result, the current variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each definite effect pattern.

"Fixed production" is a jackpot announcement production in which a fixed sound (cuin cuin) that definitely notifies that a big win will be made is output during the execution of a variable production that will result in a big win, and the firing handle 15 emits rainbow colors. is a kind of

In step E322-17, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the confirmed effect corresponding to the confirmed effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this fixed effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the fixed effect is executed at various timings. Details of the fixed effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 34 is a dialog announcement pattern determination table for determining a dialog announcement pattern in the jackpot announcement effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The word notice pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each word notice pattern, and the effect contents (effective period, word notice effect contents) of each word notice pattern. Note that the dialog announcement pattern 01 is a dialog announcement pattern in which the dialog announcement effect is not executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

"Normal lines (black)" in the line content column indicates that one of a plurality of normal lines for which it is unclear whether or not a jackpot game is likely to be executed is displayed in black letters. .
"Chance (black)" indicates that one of a plurality of chance lines suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters.
“Reach (black)” indicates that one reach speech that confirms execution of the reach effect is displayed in black characters.
“Reach (red)” indicates that one ready-to-win line that confirms execution of the ready-to-win effect is displayed in red letters.
"Hot (red)" indicates that one hot line is displayed in red letters, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a jackpot game will be executed.
“Extreme heat (gold)” indicates that one intense heat line is displayed in gold letters, suggesting that there is a strong possibility that a jackpot game will be executed.
“Confirmation (rainbow)” indicates that one confirmation line confirming that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed in gold letters.

The expected degree of jackpot for each line is in the order of normal lines < chance lines < reach lines (black letters) < reach lines (red letters) < hot lines (red letters) < hot lines (gold letters) < confirmed lines (rainbow letters) is set to increase with

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the lines are displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.
"Weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that the production button 17 vibrates with intensity: weak for 1 second when a line is displayed by operating the production button 17 or by the elapse of the effective period.
"Medium vibration (1 second)" indicates that the production button 17 vibrates for 1 second at medium intensity when a line is displayed by operating the production button 17 or by the elapse of the effective period.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates with intensity: strong for 1 second when a line is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period elapses.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration is set to increase in the order of weak vibration<medium vibration<strong vibration.

(Accessory notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 35(a) is a character product announcement pattern determination table for determining a character product announcement pattern in the jackpot announcement effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each character announcement pattern, and the contents of the character announcement (execution timing, operation mode) of each character announcement pattern are associated with the character announcement pattern determination table. ing. Note that the character product announcement pattern 01 is a character product announcement pattern in which the character product announcement effect is not executed.

"Slight descent" in the operation mode column indicates that the movable effect device 73 moves (lowers) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and then returns to the standby position.
"Large descent" means that the movable effect device 73 moves (falls) from the standby position to the effect position below the intermediate position, and then returns to the standby position.

The jackpot expectation degree of each operation mode is set so as to increase in the order of small fall<large fall. Although the execution timing of the character product announcement effect is only at the start of fluctuation, the character object announcement effect may be executed at other timings.

(Blackout production pattern determination table)
FIG. 35(b) is a blackout effect pattern determination table for determining a blackout effect pattern in the jackpot effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The blackout effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern, and the effect contents of each blackout effect pattern (effective period, blackout effect contents). ing. Note that the blackout effect pattern 01 is a blackout effect pattern in which no blackout effect is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

"Development failure" in the effect image column indicates that the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP ready-to-win effect fails and ends in the normal reach is to be executed.
The “weak development effect” indicates that the weak development effect, which suggests that the development to the SP ready-to-win effect is successful and that the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, is executed.
The “strong development effect” indicates that the weak development effect is executed, which suggests that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.

The degree of expectation for a big hit of each effect image is set so as to increase in the order of failure of development<light development effect<strong development effect.

(Back cut-in production pattern decision table)
FIG. 35(c) is a back cut-in effect pattern determination table for determining a back cut-in effect pattern in the jackpot effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The back cut-in effect pattern decision table contains the jackpot judgment result, variable effect pattern, selection rate (%) of each back cut-in effect pattern, and effect contents (effective period, cut-in effect contents) of each back cut-in effect pattern. are mapped. The back cut-in effect pattern 01 is a back cut-in effect pattern in which the back cut-in effect is not executed.

"None" in the button image column indicates that the operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 is not displayed during the valid period.
"Non-protruding (dark)" in the button state column indicates that the production button 17 does not emit light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the effective period.

“Weak cut-in” in the effect image column indicates that a weak cut-in image suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed is displayed.
“Strong cut-in” indicates that a strong cut-in image is displayed that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.

The degree of expectation for a big hit of each effect image is set so as to increase in the order of weak cut-in<strong cut-in.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 35(d) is a determined effect pattern determination table for determining a determined effect pattern in the big hit announcement effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The determined performance pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable performance pattern, a selection rate (%) of each determined performance pattern, and performance contents (effective period, determined performance content) of each determined performance pattern. The fixed effect patterns 01-02 are fixed effect patterns in which a fixed failure effect is executed, and the fixed effect patterns 11-12 are fixed effect patterns in which a fixed success effect is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
“Protruding (white)” indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the production button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
“Protrusion (rainbow)” indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits rainbow light during the effective period is displayed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.
"Protrusion (white)" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruded state (specific state) during the valid period, and operation prompting light emission that emits white light is performed.
“Protrusion (rainbow)” indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state (specific state) during the valid period, and operation prompting light emission that emits rainbow light is performed.

The expected degree of jackpot for each button image and button state is set to increase in the order of non-protruding (white)<protruding (white)<protruding (rainbow).

The “failure image” in the effect image column indicates that a determined failure image is displayed that suggests that the jackpot game will not be executed (≈loss).
The “success image” indicates that a determined success image is displayed to notify that a jackpot game will be executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.
"Yes (5 seconds)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates at a high intensity for 5 seconds when a success image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.

In addition, even if the failure image is displayed, it may be notified that the resurrection effect is executed after that and the jackpot game is executed, so that the display of the failure image = losing It has become.

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 36 is a confirmed effect pattern determination table for determining a confirmed effect pattern in the jackpot effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The determined effect pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and execution timing of the determined effect in each determined effect pattern. Note that the confirmed effect pattern 01 is a confirmed effect pattern in which no confirmed effect is executed. In addition, the hatched part in the column of the execution timing of the fixed effect (for example, the hatched part in the column of (ultra) shortened variation line during normal reach, during effect, effective 2, development effect, etc.) It is a production content that is not executed (does not exist) in the variable production pattern.

In addition, "effective 1" in the column of the execution timing of the fixed effect indicates the effective period of the dialogue announcement effect that may be executed during the normal fluctuation (pre-reach effect).
"Valid 2" indicates the effective period of the blackout effect that may be executed during the normal reach effect.
"Valid 3" indicates the effective period of the back cut-in effect that may be executed during the SP ready-to-win effect.
"Valid 4" indicates the valid period in the determined effect executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect.
“◯” indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.

34 to 36, the first feature related to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is that in the variable production, the determined success production based on the operation of the production button 17 is executed after the execution of the confirmation production (after the output of the confirmation sound). (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate), and the determined success effect based on the operation of the effect button 17 is executed without executing the fixed effect (the first movable member 73a and the second The point is that the movable member 73b may operate. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and a thrilling feeling, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature related to the production using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the SP reach fluctuation production in which the SP reach production is executed after the normal reach production, and the SP reach production is executed after the normal reach production, and then the SP SP reach. The execution mode (execution ratio, execution timing) of the fixed production is different from the SPSP reach variable production in which the production is executed, and the fixed production can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable production, but the operation of the production button 17 is performed. One of the points is that the final effect is not executed during the effective period of the accompanying jackpot preview effect (line preview effect, blackout effect, back cut-in effect, final effect). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the determination performance is executed when the performance button 17 is to be operated and the desire to operate the performance button 17 is reduced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

A third feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 is that in the variable effects, the effect button 17 is operated when the first movable member 73a operates and when the first movable member 73a does not operate due to the character object announcement effect. The execution mode of the jackpot announcement production (line announcement production, blackout production, back cut-in production, final production) and the execution ratio of the fixed production are different, and the fixed production can be executed at multiple timings during the variable production. , The fixed effect is not executed during the effective period of the above-mentioned big hit notice effect (line notice effect, blackout effect, back cut-in effect, final effect). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the determination performance is executed when the performance button 17 is to be operated and the desire to operate the performance button 17 is reduced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, even in the above-mentioned jackpot announcement production (line announcement production, blackout production, back cut-in production, decision production), during the effective period of the back cut-in production in which the operation promotion production is not executed, the fixed production will be executed. can be

As a fourth feature relating to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in the variable production, the fixed production can be executed before the fixed production is executed, and the dialogue announcement production with low expectation for big win is executed. By doing so, it is possible to easily raise the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Note that the character object announcement performance may be executed not only at the start of the variable performance, but also at the start of the ready-to-win performance, or at a timing between the start of the variable performance and the start of the ready-to-win performance. In this case, it is preferable to determine the timing at which the character product announcement effect is to be executed by a lottery (character product announcement pattern).

As a fifth feature relating to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. The effect button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (second state) when the effective period (the effective period of the determined effect) is generated. By doing so, it becomes easier to raise the expectation of the player during the ready-to-win effect than before the ready-to-win effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the effect button 17 is prevented from protruding during the effective period of the dialogue notice effect executed before the ready-to-win effect, but the effect button 17 protrudes at a lower rate than the effective period of the fixed effect. You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 may be projected at a predetermined rate only in the event of a big win, or the production button 17 may be projected at a lower rate than in the case of a loss. can be

As a sixth feature related to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. In the second period (during the SPSP ready-to-win effect), the probability of the effect button 17 projecting during the valid period is higher. By doing so, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectation during the second period of the ready-to-win effect after the first period of the ready-to-win effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the effect button 17 does not protrude during the effective period of the blackout effect executed in the first period of the ready-to-win effect, but the effect button 17 protrudes at a lower rate than the effective period of the fixed effect. state. In this case, the production button 17 may be projected only in the case of a big win, or the production button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate than in the case of a loss. good.

As a seventh feature relating to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. (dialogue notice effect, blackout effect, back cut-in effect, final effect), and the specific effect is the first effect that can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable effect and is executed by operating the effect button 17. (back cut-in effect) and a second effect (dialogue notice effect, blackout effect, determined effect) that is executed without operation of the effect button 17, and specific reach variation effect (SP reach change effect) Execution of the first effect is regulated at another timing (from start of fluctuation to start of SP ready-to-win effect) before the execution timing of the specific effect during execution. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the specific ready-to-win production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the above-mentioned specific effect, operation of the effect button 17 such as back cut-in effect is performed in addition to the operation non-required effect that is executed even if the effect button 17 is not operated, such as the auction advance notice effect and the final effect. An operation request effect that is not executed unless it is required is further provided, and another timing before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of the development effect such as the SP reach effect that develops from the normal reach effect and the SP SP reach effect (for example, the development effect is decided) Before the performance is executed), the execution of the operation request performance is regulated, and in the case of a variation performance that will be a big hit (a command specifying a variable performance pattern that is a big hit), a specific performance during the execution of the development performance At another timing before the execution timing of , the specific effect as the operation request effect may be executable. Also, at another timing before the specific performance execution timing during execution of the development performance, execution of the operation request performance may be restricted by a predetermined lottery.

As the eighth feature related to the production using the table shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, there are a plurality of dialogue announcement productions with different production modes (line content, button vibration mode), and the second jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player. When the (full-rotation ready-to-win effect) is executed, there is a case where a special mode (extreme heat (gold) of the dialogue notice pattern 7) is executed, and the second jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than the second jackpot game. When one jackpot game (SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed, the special mode speech announcement effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the second jackpot game is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization (0 clear) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt ), etc., and permits all interrupts in step T3.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71 ) backlight light intensity (value) adjustment, and adjustment mode related to volume and light intensity adjustment (whether volume adjustment is possible, whether light intensity adjustment is possible, initial volume value (any of 0 to 5) and light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and light amount value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed when the game machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is activated).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the voice output device 9 outputs the perform processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (main display device 70 , a process for adjusting the amount (value) of the backlight of the sub-display device 71).

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable performance and at the end of the variable performance (stop of the performance pattern 70a). . In addition, during the period from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the game progress control is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, various types of board unit 500 During the initial operation of the drive source, etc., until the timer interrupt is started by the main control board 110), an important (high security level) abnormality (power supply Power-on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are controlled (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease.

The supervising CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode in which the light amount of the backlight of the display device (main display device 70 and sub display device 71) is reduced to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it has received an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag indicating a frame update timing for updating the display image of the display device (main display device 70, sub-display device 71) is set in the supervising RAM 141c. do. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set by the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing/display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). is set by the V blank interrupt processing which is executed each time the is received. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display device ( Processing for displaying on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71) is performed. In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start timing and end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, and look-ahead effect) performed on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71. It's like Note that effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (suspended display by the first sub-suspend display 83 and the second sub-suspend display 84, effect operation of the movable effect device 73) are frame-updated. Sometimes it matches the timing, and sometimes it doesn't match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) is performed.

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

Thus, at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the production pattern 70a), the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk are possible, but the player can operate. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During the notification (output of notification sound) of the door open error), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity with the switch 22 operable by the game clerk, but the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with the cross key 19 operable by the player. are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment on the game parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light amount does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that while the abnormality is being notified (output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key 19 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and the light intensity value may be disabled. may be restricted between 0 and 2, for example.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp control unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the character object initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a selects " 1” is set.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessories (movable effect device 73, sub display device 71, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set to "2 ”, etc. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 38, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning the various accessories to the origin position, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the operation of returning various roles to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and it is possible to separate and check the return operation and the initial operation and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 38, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp control unit 150 .

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin state of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) is "0". If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is moved. The effect device 73 is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The sub-display device 71 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the ramp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position. A board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. moves the process to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information (movable effect device return abnormality information, sub-display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c, At step R105-10, the timer for board accessory abnormality determination is cleared.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to drive the sub display device 71, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". 1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of returning the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub display device 71) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

At step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and at step R105-15, the effect button 17 is held within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return error has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, performs the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

Thus, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. Both of them are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (simultaneously), but are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable effect device 73→sub display device 71 order). Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the movable effect device 73 and the sub-display device 71 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two characters from exerting loads on each other, which can lead to the inconvenience that both the characters are damaged at the same time. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 39, the operation of returning the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) to the origin position and the movement of the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin position. The return operation can be performed simultaneously (simultaneously). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 39, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 39, the operation of returning the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) to the origin position and the movement of the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin position. When both of the return actions are finished, the process for shifting to the initial action process is performed. Therefore, the returning motion of various accessories to the origin position and the initial motion of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separate and confirm the returning motion and initial motion of various accessories. .

The movable effect device 73 and the sub-display device 71 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (the order of the movable effect device 73 →the sub-display device 71). You may start. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the movable effect device 73 and the sub-display device 71, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various characters to be executed next.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of lamp control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 41(a)) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessories (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine one initial operation pattern.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp is set in the RAM 150c The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 41(b)) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41(b), one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command. .

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the lamp is set in the RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 40, the initial action of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed simultaneously ( at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 40, when there is a return abnormality in the movable effect device 73 and the sub-display device 71 that constitute the board accessory, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 and the sub-display device 71 is performed. is set not to run. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from being completely out of order or damaged by forcibly initializing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 40, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete breakdown or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 40, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return abnormality is performed. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 40, when both the initial action of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed, , the initial operation process ends. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the production action, and it may occur that it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the production action. Gone.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table for determining an initial motion pattern of a board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub display device 71).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

The "movable effect device small descent" is an operation in which the movable effect device 73 moves (lowers) from the standby position to a midway position slightly below the standby position, and the "movable effect device large descent" The movable effect device 73 moves (lowers) from the standby position to the effect position below the middle position. It's becoming

"Movement of sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-display device 71 rises from the standby position to the effect position, and "sub-display device origin return" is an operation in which the sub-display device 71 returns to the standby position. It's becoming

"Movable effect device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided on the movable effect device 73, and "Sub display device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub display device 71. is.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the LED flashes in red to notify an abnormality.

Also, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the sub-display device LED is not described. This is because the red blinking is performed for anomaly notification.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board accessories (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) is the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

In addition, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the movable effect device 73 and the sub-display device 71 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. and the sub-display device 71 may have different operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

In addition, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 and/or the sub-display device 71 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the initial operation when the power is turned on An operation not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be performed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be performed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the sub-display device 71). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. While the mode is the same, the point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

When the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED is made different, while the light emission of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. The aspects may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state. . In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

As a fourth feature of the board accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub display device 71). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41(a), when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, during the variable display of special symbols, or during the jackpot game. The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) is different from that at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game, but the movable effect device LED and the sub display are turned off. The device LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

As a sixth feature of the board accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. When the sub display device 71 has no return abnormality, the sub display device 71 is initialized without performing the initial operation of the movable effect device 73, and the movable effect device 73 is returned to the sub display device 71 without the return abnormality. When there is an abnormality, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 is performed and the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing a frame role-play initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-play (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Production button large rise" is an operation in which the production button 17 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the production position (upper position). It is an operation to return to

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17). Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41(b), the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on does not exist in the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to execute an action. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

As a third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a fourth feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessories (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

As a fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41(b), the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored , the number of emitted colors is different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that it includes an emission color that is not in the emission color in . Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

As a seventh feature of the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is different from the time during which the production button 17 vibrates during the operation production executed by operating the production button 17 in the period. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 17 .

As an eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17 where the detection of whether or not is performed. Therefore, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change)
With reference to FIG. 42, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various driving sources during setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when a setting change operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 starts the setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, a setting change notification is displayed to confirm that the setting is being changed and to confirm the operation of various drive sources (display of the screen during setting change, voice during setting change "Setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of various driving sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various driving sources is stopped (driving source = OFF), and thereafter various driving is performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of the source are repeated.

At the timing of T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed in a state in which the operation time of the various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are activated. As soon as it is finished, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the setting value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub-display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control board 130 are started to return and initialize, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm solenoid operation Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice).

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub-display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control board 130 are started to return and initialize, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation)
With reference to FIG. 44, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "Setting confirmation in progress" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed before the operating time of the various driving sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated. At the same time, the operation of various driving sources immediately stops (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources ends, and the display of the set values on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 also ends. do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display device 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols pending number, display of normal symbols pending number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power supply restoration notification is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub-display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control board 130 are started to return and initialize, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating member 51, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) Therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (including the replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) ), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is activated. Information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, and right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not given an extra processing load, and various drive sources It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it prompts the user to confirm that the settings are being changed and to check the operation of the various driving sources. setting change notification for RWM clear preparation (RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of operation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of setting and confirmation of operation of various drive sources) Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. It is possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.) without creating a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the pre-start state ends due to the set value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation is immediately completed even before the operation time of various drive sources has elapsed. Since the operation of the various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources will not be performed in the state where the game can be played, and it will be confused with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various driving sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED is extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the big prize opening LED, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 and the Since the open signal is not output even though the second big winning hole is open, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being given an extra processing load, and the game machine 1 It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the game progress control is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RWM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, "driving source initial operation" or "please check the operation of the solenoid" prompts visual confirmation of the initial operation of various driving sources. Although such characters are not displayed, such characters may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on after the progress control of the game is started to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example for initial operation of various drive sources)
Modified examples of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that this modification differs from the above-described embodiment in that the drive source processing operation process is performed after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 45, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change in the modified example will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after setting changes in the modification.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when a setting change operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 starts the setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub-display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control board 130 are started to return and initialize, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
With reference to FIG. 46, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear in the modification will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various driving sources after RWM clearing in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done. At this time, the above-described RWM clear preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub-display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control board 130 are started to return and initialize, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 47, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting confirmation in the modified example will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation in the modification.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub-display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control board 130 are started to return and initialize, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating member 51, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) Therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (including the replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) ), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is displayed. Information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, and right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not given an extra processing load, and various drive sources It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the game result is not affected after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is finished. Since the various drive sources for operating the movable body to be given are initially operated, there is no need to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of the various drive sources while changing settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation). , it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed, after the operation standby time has passed, various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are activated. Since the operation is to be started, it is possible to have time to check the operation of various drive sources after the setting change (setting confirmation) is completed, and the operation check can be performed appropriately. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, it is determined whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results is after the setting change mode or after the RWM clear preparation mode. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode has ended, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the game machine 1 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce costs (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the big winning opening LED is extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the big prize opening LED, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 and the Since the open signal is not output even though the second big winning hole is open, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being given an extra processing load, and the game machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, during the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values By not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display the set values and the performance information of the game machine. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement arcade, and to accurately judge failures of various drive sources.

(Display example of special symbol indicator)
A display example of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), the special symbol display device displays a failing special symbol in which the LED on the right end lights up as the first display mode after the power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. ), the display mode is such that the lighting position of the LED changes every 32 ms. Specifically, control is performed to turn on the corresponding LED every 4 ms, which is the cycle of the timer interrupt, and by continuing this over eight timer interrupts, the same LED remains lit for 32 ms.

48 (b) ~ (h) display mode change is one cycle (= 256ms) cycle variation is performed multiple times, and when the special symbol variation time elapses, Figure 48 (i) ~ (l ) (loss special symbol, first big win special symbol, second big win special symbol, third big win special symbol) is stop-displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, when the next special symbol variation display is started after the stop time has elapsed, the cycle variation is performed multiple times from the display mode of FIG. 48(b), and any of FIGS. is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds=500 ms).

In cycle variation, two LEDs are turned on and their lighting positions are changed (moved). , and the lighting position may be changed.

In the cycle variation, one cycle is composed of eight types of display modes, but one cycle may be composed of two types of display modes (for example, all lighting and all lights off), and one cycle may be composed of three or more types of display modes. good too. Even in this case, the time for one cycle should be shorter than the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds=500 ms).

Further, in the present embodiment, the small winning game is not executed to open the variable winning portion for 1.8 seconds. It is preferable to stop and display the small winning special symbol. In this case, the stop time of the small hit special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time (32 ms) of one display mode in the cycle variation.

(Production example for each production mode)
A display effect example for each effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.

In production mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 49(a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The production pattern 70a is displayed in the first form (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the first mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is performed for 0.75 seconds.

Further, in the icon display areas (the first reserved icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C), the normal icons are displayed in the first form (hexagon). Then, the normal icon of the first mode is displayed on the main display device 70 as a swing motion (drawing motion) from the first posture (initial posture) tilting to the left, to the second posture tilting to the right, and then to the first posture again. During the display, it is always repeated with one period of 2 seconds.

In production mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 49(b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The production pattern 70a is displayed in a second mode (a lantern-shaped base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

Then, the effect pattern 70a of the second mode performs downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the variable effect, but the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update operation). is performed for 0.5 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle shape). Then, the normal icon of the second mode is displayed on the main display device 70 as a swinging motion (drawing motion) from the first posture (initial posture) leaning to the left, to the second posture leaning to the right, and then to the first posture again. During the display, it is always repeated with one period of 2 seconds.

In production mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 49(c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The production pattern 70a is displayed in the third mode (R-chamfered rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by R-chamfered hexagonal images), and the special pattern TZ is common to all production modes. are displayed in a common mode (numeric image).

Then, the effect pattern 70a of the third mode performs downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the variable effect, and the enlarged display of the effect pattern 70a is performed as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update fluctuation). is performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display areas (the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C), normal icons are displayed in the third mode (star shape). Then, the normal icon of the third mode rotates from a first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is positioned at the top, passes through a second posture in which the specific top is moved, and then reverts to the first posture. During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode D (probability variable game state), as shown in FIG. 49(c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, number image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in the common mode (number image) common to all effect modes.

The effect symbol 70a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black point is positioned at the top, passes through the second posture in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first posture (representation). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode E (probability variable game state), as shown in FIG. 49(e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, number image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in the common mode (number image) common to all effect modes.

The effect symbol 70a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black point is positioned at the top, passes through the second posture in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first posture (representation). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode F (time-saving game state), as shown in FIG. 49(f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, numeric image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in the common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the effect pattern 70a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update change) in the variable effect, and the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a is reduced to 0 as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. .4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth mode (pentagon). Then, the normal icon of the fifth aspect rotates from a first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is positioned at the top, passes through a second posture in which the specific top is moved, and then returns to the first posture (representation). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In the production modes A to F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the special icon is a common aspect common to all production modes ( circle). Then, the special icon of the common mode is a rotation action (drawing action ) is always repeated at a cycle of 2.5 seconds during display on the main display device 70 .

Also, in production modes A to F, the special symbol TZ displayed in a common mode (number image) is scrolled downward (update fluctuation) without performing the pre-variation operation in the fluctuation production. The updating operation for repeatedly updating the numeric images 1 to 9 is repeatedly performed in one cycle of 0.9 seconds. As for the special symbol TZ, the fact that the update variation is performed suggests that the variation effect is being executed.

In this way, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the performance operation (swaying motion, rotating motion) of the pending icon is the LED of the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61). It is repeatedly executed at a period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the lighting state change period (32 ms) and the period (256 ms) of one cycle. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the pending icon is performing the performance action, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

In addition, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the performance action (swaying action, rotating action) of the hold icon is set to It is repeatedly executed at a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from (1 second). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the pending icon is performing the performance action, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

Also, in the variable effect, the effect pattern 70a performs any one of a plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the variable production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the time until the production pattern 70a performs scroll display (update fluctuation) differs depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the production pattern 70a performs in the variable production. There is a case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the variable production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the production pattern 70a performs any of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the fluctuation production, the pre-variation actions and scroll display (update) of the three production patterns 70a variation) may be made to have the same starting order (left→middle→right).

Also, depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the production pattern 70a has executed in the fluctuation production, the pre-variation operation and scroll display (update fluctuation) of the three production patterns 70a The starting order may be changed (floating display: left→middle→right, enlarged display: center→left→right, reduced display: right→middle→left, etc.).

Moreover, it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of pre-variation motions of the performance pattern 70a for each performance mode so that the degree of expectation for a big win is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the pending icon may be set to one type for each performance mode so as not to give the expectation of a big win.

(Example of the display effect of the number of pending)
A display rendering example of the number of reservations on the main display device 70 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the number of reservations is "0" and the customer is waiting, as shown in FIG. "0" is displayed in each of the display area SA and the second pending number display area SB.

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the first reservation number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. The pending icon HI of the mode is additionally displayed (increased display) with one frame of non-animation, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is started from there.

Then, when the first pending number is reduced to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation is started to shift display (decrease display, change display) of the icon HI toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA becomes "0" in one frame of non-animation. It is updated (decreased display). At this time, the pending icon HI is displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the performance action (shaking action) is continued.

After that, when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a larger size than the pending icon HI and in an opaque manner as shown in FIG. 50(d). ) continues.

In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the first reserved number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1" in 1 frame of non-animation (increase display). be done. At this time, the additional display of the pending icon HI starts a production action (shaking action) so as to be synchronized with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is accompanied by an effect image and is a semi-transparent minimal icon. The display is enlarged from size to normal size. That is, in a state where the special symbols are variably displayed, the display of the hold icon HI may not start from the first posture (initial posture).

Then, when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, as shown in FIG. , and the performance action (swaying action) is continuously performed.

After that, when it is determined that the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the first reserved number becomes "2" and the icon change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 50(g), A 20-frame animation in which the second special display mode (blue) pending icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) in the second display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B is started, and the first pending number display area SA The pending digit is updated (incremented) to "2" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed hold icon HI has a performance action (rotating action) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is positioned at the top. It starts and is enlarged and displayed from a semi-transparent extra-small size to a normal size with an effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increase display) of the first special mode (blue) hold icon HI is finished, as shown in FIG. 50(h), the additionally displayed first special mode (blue) hold icon HI is It has a normal size and is displayed opaquely, and the performance action (rotation action) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. Animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed gradually increases in transparency with an effect image and is erased.

After that, when the first pending number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation is started in which two pending icons HI are shifted and displayed (reduced display) toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" in one frame of non-animation. (decrease display). At this time, the two pending icons HI are displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the effect action (swaying action, rotating action) is continuously performed.

Then, when the shift display of the two pending icons HI is finished, as shown in FIG. The icon TI has a size larger than that of the pending icon HI and is displayed opaquely, and the performance action (shaking action) is continuously performed. In addition, the suspended icon HI in the first special display mode, which had been displayed in the second display portion of the first suspended icon display area 70B, is displayed in the normal size and opaquely in the first display portion, and accordingly the icon changes. Although the effect changes to the second special display mode (a kind of special icon), the effect operation (rotating operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the first reservation number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increase display) is started, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "2" in one frame of non-animation (increase display). be done. At this time, the additional display of the pending icon HI starts a production action (shaking action) so as to be synchronized with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is accompanied by an effect image and is a semi-transparent minimal icon. The display is enlarged from size to normal size.

After that, when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, as shown in FIG. , and the performance action (swaying action) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. Animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed gradually increases in transparency with an effect image and is erased.

After that, when the first pending number is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the effect displayed in the first pending icon display area 70C is shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation is started in which the two active pending icons HI are shifted and displayed (reduced display) toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is displayed in a non-animated frame of " 1” (decreased display). At this time, the two pending icons HI are displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the effect action (swaying action, rotating action) is continuously performed.

At this time, if the condition for switching from effect mode A to effect mode B is satisfied, as shown in FIG. etc.) is displayed, and the icons in the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are visible while the pending numbers in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB are visible. Regulated.

Then, in the layer behind the shielding image, as shown in FIG. 50(q), the hold icon HI is normally displayed corresponding to the effect mode B while the display mode and the effect motion (rotating motion) of the icon TI are maintained. The status is switched to the pending icon HI. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is started from there.

Then, when the shielding image is erased, as shown in FIG. 50(r), the suspended icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B and the second suspended icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70C It becomes possible to visually recognize the icon TI in the special display mode.

In addition, even when a plurality of suspended icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal display is performed in the same way as the performance operation is performed so that the suspended icon in the normal display mode and the corresponding icon in the normal display mode are synchronized. Rendering operations are performed so that a plurality of pending icons in the mode are synchronized.

In addition, although the pending display example in the production mode A has been mainly described here, the display mode of the pending icon and the operation production mode are different in other production modes, but basically the same pending number display (production (including display at the time of mode switching) is performed.

49 to 50. As a first feature related to the production examples of FIGS. is executed in the shortest period of one frame. By doing so, it is possible to immediately perform a variable effect (decrease display of pending numbers and decrease display of pending icons) so as not to be slow, and to improve the interest of the game.

49 to 50 as a second feature, when the pending number decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the non-animated (1 frame) display of the pending number decreases, Another point is that a change display (decrease display) is executed (started at the same frame update timing) by animation (20 frames) of the pending icon to the icon. By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the timing (frame update timing) at which the display of the pending number starts to decrease is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (shift display from the pending icon to the pending icon) starts. You may make it ahead (for example, 1 frame before).

As a third characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. Also, the timing (frame update timing) at which the decreasing display of the pending number is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reservations has decreased by the number of reservations while directing the change of the number of reservations, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, the timing (frame update timing) when the pending number decrease display is completed is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) when the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon) is completed. (for example, one frame before).

As a fourth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 49 to 50, when the number of reservations increases during the variable display of special symbols, the increase display by non-animation (1 frame) of the reservation number, and the reservation icon (starting at the same frame update timing) by animation (20 frames). By doing so, the player can surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The timing (frame update timing) at which the increasing display of the pending number starts and the timing at which it ends (frame update timing) precedes the timing (frame update timing) at which the increasing display of the pending icon starts (for example, one frame before ).

A fifth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the increase display of the pending number is completed before the timing (frame update timing) at which the additional display (increase display) of the pending icon is completed. (frame update timing) is faster. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reservations has increased by the number of reservations while directing the change of the number of reservations, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the production example of FIGS. 49 to 50, when the number of reservations increases during the variable display of special symbols (variation production), compared to the case where the number of reservations increases during the customer waiting state Therefore, additional display (increase display) of the pending icon is performed over a long period (long number of frames). By doing so, the player can surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

49 to 50, the seventh feature of the production example is the production operation mode (operating while expanding) at the start (display start) of the increasing display of the pending icon, and the completion of the increasing display of the pending icon (display The point is that it is different (partly different) from the production operation mode (operation while maintaining the size) after the start). By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the number of pending games has increased, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that not only part of the operation may be changed at the start of the increased display of the pending icon and after the completion of the increased display, but all the operations may be changed.

The eighth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the display mode (semi-transparent) at the start of the increased display of the suspended icons and the display mode (opaque) after the increased display of the suspended icons is completed. Different (partially different) points can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the number of pending games has increased, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that not only the transparency but also the shape and the like may be changed between when the increased display of the pending icon is started and after the increased display is completed.

As a ninth feature related to the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50, during the variable display of the special symbols (production patterns), the pending icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first posture and the second posture ( swing motion, rotation motion, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by the reserved icon and the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. The point that the time to change to the second posture is constant every time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the suspended icon and the icon become difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that if the control load of the drawing process is large when the pending icon and the corresponding icon change from the first posture to the second posture and the processing drops (one frame's worth of drawing could not be performed), the Only then is the time taken to change to the second posture not constant, but substantially constant.

As the eleventh feature related to the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50, during the variable display of the special symbols (variable production), a plurality of icons displayed in the normal display mode (holding icons, holding icon and the icon) are synchronized to execute the production operation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by improving the appearance of the presentation action of the icon, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the timing of synchronizing the presentation action of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode with the presentation action of the other pending icons based on the newly started winning may be at the start of display or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display. It may be the hour, the start of the shift display, or the completion of the shift display.

As a twelfth feature of the production example of FIGS. 49 to 50, when the special pattern (production pattern) is stopped and displayed, the icon is erased and displayed, but after the special pattern (production pattern) is stopped and displayed, the next icon is displayed. Until the variable display (variable effect) is started, the pending icon repeats the effect operation. By doing so, it is possible for the player to grasp that the number of reservations is not "0" by means of the reservation icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A thirteenth feature of the production example of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that when a special pattern (production pattern) is stopped and displayed, the transparency of the production pattern does not change, but the icon is erased after the transparency increases. points. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when erasing the icon and naturally erase the icon, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

A fourteenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the time (scale) of one cycle of the production operation of the pending icon (the icon) is different between the first production mode and the second production mode (production mode). Mode A and production mode B, between production modes C to F) are the same. By doing so, it is possible to make the performance action of the pending icon (the icon) easier to see, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifteenth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50 is that the period in which the pending icon (the icon) changes from the first orientation to the second orientation and then to the first orientation again is defined as the first presentation mode. It is the same as the second production mode (production mode A and production mode B, between production modes C to F). By doing so, it is possible to make the performance action of the pending icon (the icon) easier to see, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixteenth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 49 to 50, the size (area) of the area where the number of reservations is displayed does not change due to the increase or decrease in the number of reservations in the number display area, but in the reservation icon display area Depending on the number of holds, the size (area) of the area where the hold icon is displayed changes (when the number of holds is singular, the hold icon is displayed in the first area, and when the number of holds is multiple (the pending icon is displayed in a second area that is larger than the first area). By doing so, it is possible for the player to grasp the increase or decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a seventeenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. (2 seconds or 3 seconds), and the hold icon displayed in a special display mode (special icon) with a higher chance of winning a jackpot than in the normal display mode changes between a first attitude and a second attitude. The point is that the effect action to be performed can be repeatedly executed in a second period (2.5 seconds) different from the first period. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the suspended icon in the normal display mode and the suspended icon in the special display mode, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

49 to 50, the eighteenth feature of the production examples is that the special symbols are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) of the number images 1 to 9 in the first cycle (0.9 seconds). It is possible, and the pending icon can perform the effect action that changes between the first posture and the second posture in a second cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making a player misunderstand that the update variation of the special symbols and the performance operation of the reserved icon are interlocked, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 19th feature according to the production example of FIGS. 49 to 50, a decrease display of the number of reservations is performed with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but in this decrease display, the reservation displayed in the number display area of the reservation The number does not move, but the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area moves (before the pending number decreased, the pending icon was displayed in the second area, which was larger than the first area, and the pending number decreased After that, the pending icon is displayed in the first area). By doing so, it is possible for the player to recognize the decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature related to the production examples of FIGS. 49 to 50, the direction of movement (downward direction) in the updating operation of the production pattern (special pattern) and the movement direction (horizontal direction) in the production operation (shaking operation) of the pending icon etc.). By doing so, it is possible to distinguish and easily recognize the update fluctuation of the production pattern (special pattern) and the production operation (swaying operation) of the reserved icon, and the production effect in the fluctuation production can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, when the number of pending customers increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the pending icon is incremented by 1 frame non-animation. You may increase and display by the animation of multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so that it may continue longer than. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the holding icon is designed to perform the production operation even during the stop display of the special design (production design), but the holding icon stops the production operation during the stop display of the special design (production design), and the next After the shift display of the pending icon accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol (decrease in the number of pending), the production operation of the pending icon may be restarted. By doing so, the player can grasp whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed depending on the presence or absence of the performance action of the pending icon, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when resuming the performance action of the pending icon after the shift display of the pending icon, even if the pending icon resumes the performance action from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (suspended icon display area, the icon display area). good. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that the variable display of the special symbols has newly started, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even when the special design (production design) is stopped and the icon is erased and displayed, the icon continues to perform the production operation, but the special design (production design) is stopped and displayed. You may make it complete|finish operation|movement. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load associated with display control.

In addition, a plurality of icons displayed in the normal display mode (holding icons, holding icon and the icon) are synchronized to perform the production operation, but the production operation is not performed in complete synchronization. , may be performed substantially in synchronism with each other. It should be noted that the timing of substantially synchronizing the rendering operation of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode with the rendering operation of the other pending icons based on the newly started winning may be at the start of display or a predetermined time after the start of display. It may be at the time when the shift display is started, or at the time when the shift display is completed.

(Specific example of the case where the variable production starts from the customer waiting state)
A specific example of the case where the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG.

FIG. 51 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 52 and 53 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 51, the player is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols has not been executed since the power was turned on, and production mode A and sound volume value "3" are set. At this time, the first special symbol display device 60 displays a failing special symbol (only the LED on the right end lights up), which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the main display device 70 waits for execution of the variable effect. The variable standby screen is displayed. Specifically, the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled (effect operation), and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are in a state in which "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is stopped ( See FIG. 52(a)). Note that the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled from the timing when the variable standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 51, when the up button or down button of the cross key 19 is operated to adjust the volume, a part of the front side of the right production pattern 70a is superimposed on the main display device 70. In this way, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "3" is displayed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a volume confirmation sound corresponding to the volume value "3" (see FIG. 52(b)). ).

At timing T2 in FIG. 51, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume, the volume value changes from "3" to "4". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated with the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "4", and the audio output device 9 outputs a volume confirmation sound (for 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the volume value "4". It is output (see FIG. 52(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 51, when the selector switch 22 is operated to lower the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", but due to the volume adjustment by the changeover switch 22, the audio output device 9 does not display the volume value corresponding to the volume value "3". No confirmation sound is output (see FIG. 52(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 51, when the game ball wins the first start port 45, the first reservation number becomes "1" and the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the main Winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) are transmitted from the control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 52(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 51, when the first reservation number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, the main control board 110 sends a start time command (special symbol A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special design specification command, a special figure variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Also, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) is started on the first special symbol display 60 (FIG. 52(f) reference).

Furthermore, since the effect control board 130 receives the command at the time of winning, a predetermined period has passed, so the first reservation number display area SA and the sub-first reservation display 83 become "1" display, and the first reservation icon display area A hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in a non-animated manner on the first display section 70B, and output of the first winning sound is started (see FIG. 52(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 51 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area The SA and the first sub-suspension display 83 are displayed as "0", and the first sub-variation display 81 starts to change display (flashing: represented by ⊚ in the figure) (see FIG. 53(g)).

Also, the pending icon HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B starts shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the effect symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scroll display, switching display). Further, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted for a predetermined period (one second), the volume value image OG is erased, and the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 53 ( g)).

In addition to the start of the audible output of the variable BGM at the start of floating display as the pre-variation operation of the effect pattern 70a, a variable start sound (a start sound that is output every time, a start sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) is output. You may do so.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 51 (at the start of the third cycle variation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 53(h)), and at the timing of T8 in FIG. ), when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), and then the scroll display (update change) of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 53(i)), and the At the timing of T9, high-speed fluctuation of all the effect symbols 70a starts (see FIG. 53(j)). When outputting the variable start sound, the output of the variable start sound should be finished at this timing (after the output of the winning sound is finished).

If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the variable display of the special symbols is executed, but the variable effect is not executed. The display period is extended without erasing the OG, and the state in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible is maintained.

Also, when the light amount image is displayed by operating the left button or right button of the cross key 19 instead of the volume value image OG, it is basically the same as when the volume value image OG is displayed. Become.

Thus, when the variable effect is started in the customer waiting state (the period in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with the cross key 19), volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment with the cross key 19 are performed for a predetermined period (1 second). Adjustments are regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player misses the important phase of the start of the variable performance by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the variable effect is started during the display of the volume value image OG, the volume value image OG is visually recognized even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not passed. is regulated (erased). Therefore, the volume value image OG does not impede the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Even if the volume value is adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed. The volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed regardless of whether the volume is adjusted or the volume is adjusted by operating the selector switch 22 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the newly set volume value, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the variable effect, the effect pattern 70a performs the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) and then starts the scroll display (update display), but the special symbol TZ is updated and changed without performing the pre-variation operation. (scrolling display, switching display) is started. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced by the action before the variation of the performance pattern 70a, and the player can grasp that the variable display of the special pattern is started by the special pattern TZ, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, in the variable effect, the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) before the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update variation). Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has been started by the special symbols TZ, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the pending display (holding icon and holding number on the main display device 70, LED holding display on the first sub holding display 83 and second sub holding display 84) is updated. It is designed to be Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, shift display of the pending icon (change to the icon TI) is started before the effect symbol 70a starts scroll display (update change). Therefore, the player can quickly perceive that the reserved memory has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a starts scroll display (update change) in the variable effect, the shift display of the pending icon (change to the icon TI) ends. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the variable performance (scroll display of the performance pattern 70a) is performed due to the reduction of the reserved memory, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, even before the production pattern 70a starts scrolling display (update fluctuation) (during stop display of the production pattern 70a, during pre-variation operation), the holding icon HI is made to perform the production operation (shaking operation, rotating operation). It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect while appealing to the player that there is a reserved memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the icon TI performs the production operation (swaying operation, rotating operation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player look at the icon TI and appeal that the variable effect is started, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even at the start of the pre-change operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect pattern 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image described later) is changed to the effect operation (horizontal scroll, scene changes, actions of characters included in the background image, etc.). Therefore, the production effect of the variable production can be enhanced together with the production pattern 70a, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode, zone background image described later) is included in the production operation (horizontal scroll, scene change, background image). character actions, etc.). Therefore, the production effect of the variable production can be enhanced together with the production pattern 70a, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state, the audible output of the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode) starts at the start of the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect pattern 70a. It is designed to be Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect has started, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, at the start of the scroll display (update variation) of the effect pattern 70a, the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode) is already audibly output. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced before the scroll display of the performance pattern 70a is started, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , after the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a in the fluctuation production is started, that is, both are intentionally started without synchronizing. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols and the start timing of the scroll display of the effect symbols 70a becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (2 to 3 cycle fluctuations After the start timing and before the start timing of the fourth cycle fluctuation), the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a in the fluctuation production is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle variation for the second and subsequent times coincides with the start timing of the scroll display of the production pattern 70a, the user misunderstands that the start timing of the variable display of the special pattern is the start of the scroll display of the production pattern 70a. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, after the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61), the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started. It's like Therefore, by starting the variable display of the special symbols and the scrolling display of the performance symbols 70a in stages, the performance effect of the game performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to let the player know that the special symbol is the main symbol and the performance symbol 70a is the secondary symbol, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started, that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the special symbol variation display and the start timing of the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ becomes unnecessary, and the control load and development burden can be reduced. It becomes possible.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation , before the start timing of the second cycle variation), the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started. Therefore, the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the update fluctuations (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbols TZ match, so that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbols is the update fluctuations of the special symbols TZ ( It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as misunderstanding that it is the start of scrolling display, switching display).

Also, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), the update variation of the special symbol TZ (scroll display , switching display) is started, that is, both are intentionally started without synchronizing them. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of the first display change in the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special pattern TZ becomes unnecessary, thereby reducing the control load and the development burden. becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to let the player know that the special symbol is dominant and the special symbol TZ is subordinate, so that the player can recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), pending display (holding icon or holding number on the main display device 70, LED holding display on the sub-first holding display 83 or the sub-second holding display 84) , that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of variable display of special symbols with the update start timing of reserved display is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), pending display (holding icon and holding number on the main display device 70, sub first holding display 83 and sub second holding display 84 LED pending display) is started to be updated. Therefore, since the start timing of the second cycle variation and the update start timing of the pending display coincide with each other, the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the time of starting the update of the pending display is avoided. becomes possible.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), the pending display (on the main display device 70 Hold icon, hold number, LED hold display on sub first hold display 83 and sub second hold display 84) start updating, that is, start without intentionally synchronizing both . Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of variable display of special symbols with the update start timing of reserved display is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the pending display is updated after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started, that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle variation for the second and subsequent times coincides with the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI, the user misunderstands that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the start of the shift display of the pending icon HI. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, after the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61), the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI is ended. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the holding icon HI is shift-displayed after the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI to the corresponding icon TI is started, that is, the two are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI becomes unnecessary, and it is possible to reduce the control load and the development load. Become.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation (before the end timing of the second cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle fluctuation from the second time onwards coincides with the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI, the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the same as the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistakenly thinking that it is the time to start the shift display.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61), the holding icon HI is shifted to the icon TI. The display is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the holding icon HI is shift-displayed to the icon TI since the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (before the start timing of the first cycle variation) , later than the start timing of the first cycle variation), the audible output of a predetermined game sound (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts, that is, both start intentionally without synchronizing. It's like Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound becomes unnecessary, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), audible output of a predetermined game sound (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the cycle fluctuation for the second and subsequent times coincides with the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound, it is determined that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the predetermined game sound. It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as misunderstanding.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (before the start timing of the first cycle variation) , the start timing of the first cycle variation is also later), the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) is started, that is, both are intentionally started without synchronizing. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols and the start timing of the audible output of the production BGM is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the audible output of the production BGM for the second and subsequent times coincide with each other, it is possible to misunderstand that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the production BGM. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (the display start of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on At the time, before the start timing of the first cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image) production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) starts , that is, they are intentionally started without synchronization. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols with the start timing of the effect operation of the background image becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (variation standby screen after power ON) At the start of the display, before the start timing of the second cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo effect), the background image (background image for each effect mode, zone background image) effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) ) is to be started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle variation and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image match from the second time onward, the user may misunderstand that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the start time of the effect operation of the background image. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Also, from before the start of the first cycle fluctuation (at the start of display of the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on) in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), Rendering operations (horizontal scrolling, scene changes, etc.) of background images (background images for each rendering mode, zone background images) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored in the customer waiting state before the variable display of the special symbols is started, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, depending on the type of pre-variation operation in the variable effect (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display It is intended that the number of cycle variations performed in the device 61) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation according to the type of pre-variation action, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, depending on the type of pre-variation operation in the variable effect (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display It is provided that the number of display changes in the cycle variation performed by the device 61) may be different. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation according to the type of pre-variation action, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is not hidden, but the effect pattern 70a is displayed (set) in the upper layer of the effect pattern 70a. Visual recognition of the volume value image OG may be restricted by changing to a state of being displayed (set) in a lower layer of , so as to overlap behind the effect pattern 70a.

(Specific example of starting winning during variable production)
A specific example of a case where the starting prize is won during the variable performance will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 54 is a timing chart in the case of starting winning during variable production, and FIG. 55 is a diagram showing examples of production at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 54, the first special symbol fluctuation display (Y-th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are updated and fluctuated (scrolling display, switching display), and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. is displayed, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 55(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 54, when the game ball wins the first start port 45, the first reservation number becomes "1" and the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the main Winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) are transmitted from the control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 55(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 54, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the winning command, the first reservation number display area SA and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "1". Become. In addition, the additional display of the animation of the suspension icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode on the first display portion of the first suspension icon display area 70B and the output of the first winning sound are started (FIG. 55(c) reference).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 54, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the additional display of the animation of the pending icon HI, the additional display of the pending icon HI animation ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends. (See FIG. 55(d)).

In this way, when a game ball wins in the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, additional display of the pending icon HI by animation is executed over a plurality of cycles of variable display. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this way, when the game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbols, the winning sounds (first winning sound, second winning sound) are output over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. there is Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, when a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbols and the winning sounds (the first winning sound and the second winning sound) are output, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without decreasing. It's like Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation effect from being hindered by the prize-winning sound, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Concrete example of executing variable production continuously)
A specific example of the case where the variable performance is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 56 is a timing chart in the case of continuously executing variable effects, and FIGS. 57 and 58 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 56, the first special symbol variation display (the Nth cycle variation from the start of variation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped, and the central production pattern 70a is scrolled (updated) at a low speed, and the special pattern TZ is updated and fluctuated (scrolled). display, switching display). Two suspended icons HI in the normal display mode are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. It is audibly output (see FIG. 57(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 56 (at the start of the N+1th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the center effect symbol 70a scrolled (updated variation) is temporarily stopped, the voice output device 9 is temporarily stopped. Sound output is started, and the character of the central production pattern 70a performs a production action (a pre-stop motion of shaking the head), and all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 57(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 56 (during the N+2th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period has passed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 57(c)). .

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 56, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 57(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 56, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and stop display of the effect symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") is started ( See FIG. 57(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 56, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 57(f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 56, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "2" to "1" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 is transferred to the effect control board 130. A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 58 (g )reference).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 56 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display The device 83 becomes "1" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the first sub variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 58(h)).

Also, the two pending icons HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started and the effect symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts updating and varying (scrolling display, switching display) (see FIG. 58(h)).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 56 (during the second cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the floating display of the effect pattern 70a, the look-ahead effect effect executed only by the current variation effect is started, and the effect is performed. A blue effect image EF is displayed around the pattern 70a (see FIG. 58(i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 56 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the two pending icons HI is completed, the earliest one pending icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). . At this time, an icon change effect at the time of start of variation is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, after which scroll display (update variation) of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 58(i)).

In this way, the variable BGM that has been audibly output from before the start of the pre-change operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the production design 70a (during the stop display of the production design 70a) can be performed even during the execution of the pre-variation operation. Continuous (uninterrupted) audible output. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if a plurality of variable effects are spun, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the icon change effect is executed at the start of the variable effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the icon shift display is performed instead of changing the icon display mode from the start of the icon shift display. At the time of completion (after), the display mode of the icon is changed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the icon change presentation by highlighting the change in the display mode of the icon, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

After the pre-stop effect (movement of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) in the variable effect is completed, the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are stop-displayed. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (movement of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) in the variable effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of the variable production pattern, when the production pattern 70a temporarily stopped first (for example, the left production pattern 70a) is performing the pre-stop production, the production pattern 70a to be temporarily stopped next (for example, the right production pattern 70a) ), there are times when the pre-stop effect is being performed and times when the update variation (scrolling display) is being performed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved. Although the effect pattern 70a to be temporarily stopped first and the effect pattern 70a to be temporarily stopped next are the same in the effect mode of the pre-stop effect, they may be different effect modes. In addition, in the case of shortened variation, the inter-stop effect may not be performed.

In addition, after the pre-stop production (movement of the character of the production pattern 70a shaking his head, output of temporary stop sound, etc.) in the fluctuation production is completed, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub first fluctuation display 81 (sub first The change display (update change) of the 2-change display 82) ends. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (movement of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) in the variable effect is completed, disappearance display of the icon is started. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (movement of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and then disappearance display of the icon ends. It's like Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop production (movement of the character of the production pattern 70a shaking his head, output of temporary stop sound, etc.) in the fluctuation production is completed, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub first fluctuation display 81 (sub first The change display (update change) of the 2-change display 82) ends, and then disappearing display of the icon ends. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a is stop-displayed after executing the pre-stop production (movement of the character shaking his head), but the special pattern TZ is stop-displayed without executing the pre-stop production. Therefore, the effect of the variable performance is enhanced by the performance pattern 70a, and the special pattern TZ allows the player to grasp the end of the variable display of the special pattern, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a is stopped after performing the pre-stop action (movement of the character shaking its head), but the background image (each The background image corresponding to the production mode) continues the production operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop action of the effect pattern 70a or after the stop display, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the variable production, after the pre-stop production (movement of the character of the production pattern 70a shaking its head, output of temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, but the production pattern 70a and the special Even during the stop display of the symbol TZ, the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode) continues to perform the production operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the performance symbol 70A and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (before the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last before the end timing of the second cycle variation, after the start timing of the last cycle variation, and after the end timing of the last cycle variation), the production pattern 70a is displayed in a predetermined manner (temporary stop display, stop display). It is designed to be Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

In addition, before the final cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, the player can grasp the flow of the game that the variable display of the special symbol ends after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last The special symbol TZ is stop-displayed later than the end timing of the cycle variation and after the stop-display timing of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of effects related to the stop display of the special symbol TZ, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

Also, during the execution of the variable performance, the pending icon HI is made to perform the performance operation (swaying operation, rotating operation), and the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) is the last in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbol. Even after the end of the cycle variation of , the effect operation of the hold icon HI is continued. Therefore, the player can recognize that the number of reservations is not "0" by the reservation icon HI, and the player can be prevented from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last After the end timing of the cycle variation and after the stop display timing of the special symbol, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends. Therefore, it is possible to expand the range of effects related to disappearing display of the icon TI, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

Further, after the cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) is completed, disappearance display of the icon TI is completed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the icon TI is erased because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation effect) in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) Audible output of (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, after the end timing of the last cycle variation) , After the stop display timing of the special symbol), it is possible to end. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of effects when the predetermined game sound is audibly output, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

In addition, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation effect) in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) It is possible to terminate the audible output (such as a temporary stop tone) before the end of the cycle variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression of the previous variable display from being carried over to the next variable display, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, a predetermined game sound (fluctuation BGM) that has been output before the final cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), It is possible to continue audible output even after the end of the cycle variation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) are continuously executed even after the end of the cycle variation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the look-ahead effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect) executed with the start of the variable effect is executed after the first cycle change in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbol. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the look-ahead effect is executed after the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example when the variable effect is started without being able to receive the stop command normally)
59 to 60, a specific example will be described in which the variable effect is started without being able to receive the stop command normally.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the stop command cannot be received normally and the variable effect is started, and FIG. 60 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T2 in FIG. 59 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T2 in FIG. 56, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T3 will be described.

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 59, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 60(d)).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ should be started at the timing of T4 in FIG. 59, but the effect symbol 70a And the stop display of special symbols TZ etc. will not be started, the variable display period in the sub first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ will be extended.

Next, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 59, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number changes from "1" to "0" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to. In addition, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 60 (e )reference).

Then, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 59 (during the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display The indicator 83 becomes "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts from the beginning (extinguishing) (see FIG. 60(f)).

Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased without animation, and the pending icon HI displayed in the first display unit starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. do. Furthermore, after the variable performance is started and the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed at the symbol stop position for a moment, the floating display as the pre-variation operation is started, and the special symbols that were scrolled (updated and varied) are displayed. TZ continues scroll display without stop display (see FIG. 60(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T7 in FIG. 59 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. After that, the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 60(g)).

In this way, when the first command (command at start) is received, the variable performance is started, and when the second command (command at stop) is received, the variable performance is terminated. When a third command (next start time command) is received in a state in which it is not started, the current variable performance is forcibly terminated and the next variable performance is started. In other words, when the second command (command at the time of stop) is received, the variable effect ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (the next command at the start) is received, the variable effect ends. It's like In other words, both when the second command is received and when the second command is not received, the previous variable effect is terminated during execution of the next variable effect. Therefore, the previous variable performance can be appropriately terminated by the start of the next variable performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, when the start command is received during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed at the design stop position for a moment (same as when the stop command is normally received) mode) to start a variable effect (here, floating display). Therefore, it is possible to start the variable performance in the same manner as when the start command is received during the stop display of the performance pattern 70a, and the game when the variable performance is started from the state where the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the start time command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the displayed icon TI is erased and displayed in a non-animation, that is, in a shorter time than the erased display in the animation. Therefore, the next time the hold icon HI is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C, the shift-display will not be hindered, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

It should be noted that if the command at the start is received by the production control board 130 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormality or noise, the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 (for example, 13.5 second variation of normal reach) and the content of the variable effect pattern of the variable effect executed on the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of SP reach effect) may be different. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60, the main display device 70 is in a state where the variable effect (specifically, the SP ready-to-win effect) is executed, and in this state the next start. When the hour command is received, the current variable performance is forcibly terminated and the next variable performance is started. Regarding this point, the operation is the same for a gaming machine that transmits/receives a start command but does not transmit/receive a stop command.

(Concrete example when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits)
A specific example of the case where the normal variable effect ends and the customer waits for customers will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 61 is a timing chart when the normal variable effect ends and the customer wait state is entered, and FIGS. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 61, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped, and the central production pattern 70a is scrolled (updated) at a low speed, and the special pattern TZ is updated and fluctuated (scrolled). display, switching display). Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output. Further, a volume value image OG is displayed so as to partially overlap with the front side of the right effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 62(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 61 (during the N-th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the central effect symbol 70a that has been scrolled (updated) is temporarily stopped, the audio output device 9 emits a temporary stop sound. The output is started, and the character of the central production pattern 70a performs the production action (pre-stop motion of shaking the head), and all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 62(b)).

Then, when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to adjust the volume at timing T2 in FIG. 61 (during the N+1th cycle variation from the start of variation), the volume value changes from "4" to "3". do. At this time, the main display device 70 is updated with the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", and the sound output device 9 starts outputting a confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" ( See FIG. 62(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 61 (during the N+1th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period has passed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 62(d)). .

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 61 (in the middle of the N+2th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the variation time of the special symbol has passed, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 When stopping command (symbol confirmation command) is sent. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 62(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 61, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display by the effect symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") is started. . Further, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 10 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the confirmation sound continues to be output (see FIG. 62(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 61, when the confirmation sound output period elapses, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 63(g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 61, the animation of the icon TI disappears. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display, the disappearing display of the icon TI by animation ends (see FIG. 63(h)).

Next, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 61, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, it becomes a customer waiting state and becomes a waiting period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the main control board 110 sends the effect control board 130 to the customer waiting. A state specification command is sent.

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 61, when a stop waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the fluctuating BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 63(i) See), when a demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing to the player is started.

It should be noted that when the stop display of the production pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) is performed in response to the reception of the stop time command during the output of the confirmation sound, while the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is regulated, the confirmation sound is designed to continue output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but this is also the same at the start of the variable effect. Even when the execution of the corresponding variable performance is started, while volume adjustment by the cross key 19 is restricted, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period elapses.

When a predetermined period of time elapses after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped (muted). The audible output is not stopped, and for example, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) when a customer waiting state designation command, a jackpot game opening designation command, or the like is received next time.

In this way, when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed in the variable production (period in which volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible), volume adjustment by the cross key 19 and over a predetermined period (1 second) Light quantity adjustment is regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player misses the important phase of the stop display of the production pattern 70a by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

When the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the production pattern is stopped and displayed even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not passed. In order to ensure the visibility of 70a, visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased). Therefore, the player can confirm the stop-displayed effect pattern 70a without obstructing the visibility of the stop-displayed effect pattern 70a by the volume value image OG, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, when the variable effect is started or the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the cross key 19 is regulated, but the volume confirmation sound is output during the output period (0. 5 seconds) has passed, the output is continued. Therefore, the player can recognize that the volume has been adjusted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the normal variable effect ends and the customer waits, the audible output of the variable BGM continues for a predetermined period. Therefore, compared with the case where the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) immediately after the normal variable performance is finished, the player is less likely to want to quit the game, and the operation of the game machine is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a performs the pre-stop operation and then is stopped and displayed, but the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) continues even during the pre-stop operation or the stop display of the production pattern 70a. and is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop action of the performance pattern 70a or during the stop display, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the variable production, after the pre-stop production (movement of the character of the production pattern 70a shaking its head, output of temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, but the production pattern 70a and the special Even after the symbols TZ are stopped and displayed, the audible output of the production BGM (variable BGM for each production mode) is continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the normal fluctuation production, the production pattern 70a is stopped after performing the pre-stop action (movement of the character shaking its head), but when a predetermined time elapses after the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, production BGM (for each production mode audible output of the fluctuation BGM) is stopped. Therefore, the continuous audible output of the effect BGM can be prevented from annoying the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a performs the pre-stop action and then is stopped and displayed. is adjustable. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the player to adjust the volume of the effect BGM, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when various error notification sounds are being output during the pre-stop operation of the effect pattern 70a, the output of the effect BGM is restricted (volume reduction or silence).

When the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, instead of hiding the volume value image OG, the production pattern 70a is displayed (set) in the upper layer. You may change to the state displayed (set) in the lower layer of the pattern 70a. In this way, since the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the production pattern 70a, the visual recognition of the volume value image OG is restricted, while the visibility of the production pattern 70a is ensured, and the stop display is performed. The player can confirm the effect pattern 70a to be displayed.

In addition, when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the customer waiting state, the volume confirmation sound is output, and when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variable effect, the volume confirmation sound is not output. It is also possible to output no volume confirmation sound when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during the customer waiting state, and to output the volume confirmation sound when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during the variable presentation. .

In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 even during the customer waiting state or during the variable effect. The volume value image OG may be displayed when the volume is adjusted by the arrow key 19, and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variable effect.

In addition, when the stop display of the production pattern 70a is performed in response to the reception of the stop command during output of the confirmation sound, or when the execution of the variable performance is started in response to the reception of the start command during the output of the confirmation sound. However, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses. In this case, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound, so that the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound can be easily heard, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Concrete example when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally)
64 and 65, a specific example will be described in which the end of the normal variation effect is delayed due to the normal reception of the stop command.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart in the case where the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed due to a failure to normally receive the stop command, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Since the timings T0 to T3 in FIG. 64 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T3 in FIG. 61, a description thereof will be omitted, and the timing after T4 will be described.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 64 (in the middle of the N+2th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the special symbol variation time elapses, a stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. sent. Also, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 65(e)).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ should have been started at the timing of T5 in FIG. , special symbols TZ, etc. will not be displayed. Then, the variable display period on the sub-first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the cross key 19 This means that the period during which volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible is extended (see FIG. 65(f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 64, when the confirmation sound output period elapses, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 65(g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 64, the special symbol stop time elapses. Then, it becomes a customer waiting state and a waiting period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.例文帳に追加

After that, at timing T8 in FIG. 64, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C disappears in non-animation, and the effect symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") are displayed at the symbol stop position. (= stop display state). On the other hand, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 10 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 65(h)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 64, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the previous operation of the cross key 19 for volume adjustment) has passed, the volume value image OG is hidden (see FIG. 65 ( i)), at the timing of T10 in FIG. 64, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the fluctuating BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 63 ( j)), and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed to appeal to the player to play the game.

Note that even if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command transmitted from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, basically the main control board As in the case where the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop transmitted from 110, the variable effect is not executed. The OG is no longer erased.

In addition, when the stop time command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped, the icon TI disappears in non-animation, the production pattern 70a and the special Since the symbol TZ is not stopped and displayed, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image OG is not erased.

In addition, when the stop time command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not performed, so a predetermined period (30 seconds) is required after entering the customer waiting state. Even if it has passed, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is maintained.

In this way, when the first command (command at start) is received, the variable performance is started, and when the second command (command at stop) is received, the variable performance is terminated. When the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received in a state in which the player is not in the waiting state, the current variable effect is forcibly ended and the customer waiting state is entered. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable effect ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received, the variable effect ends. It's like In other words, both when the second command is received and when the second command is not received, the variable effect is terminated when shifting to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately end the variable presentation by the start of the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, if the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start or the command at the time of stop transmitted from the main control board 110 (disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, disconnection of the connector, etc. ), the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are not restricted, and the state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are possible is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the player regarding sound volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start or the command at the time of stop transmitted from the main control board 110 (disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, disconnection of the connector, etc.) , the display of the volume value image OG is maintained until the display period of the volume value image OG elapses. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the player regarding sound volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that if the command at the start is received by the production control board 130 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormality or noise, the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 (for example, 13.5 second variation of normal reach) and the content of the variable effect pattern of the variable effect executed on the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of SP reach effect) may be different. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60, the main display device 70 is in a state where the variable effect (specifically, the SP ready-to-win effect) is executed, and in this state, the customer is waiting. When the specified command is received, the current variable effect is forcibly terminated and the player waits for customers. Regarding this point, the operation is the same for a gaming machine that transmits/receives a start command but does not transmit/receive a stop command.

(Concrete example when the loss normal reach fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits)
66 to 68, a specific example of the case where the lost normal reach fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits for customers will be described.

FIG. 66 is a timing chart when the lost normal reach variable effect ends and the customer waits. FIGS. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 66, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are updated and fluctuated (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 67(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 66, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started in which the central effect pattern 70a is scrolled at a low speed while the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started. is stopped (muted) and output of normal reach BGM is started (see FIG. 67(b)).

66, when the dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the effect button 17 is pressed. The effective period of promotion effect and effect button 17 for prompting the operation is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and the voice output device 9 prompts "press". is output (see FIG. 67(c)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 66, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP ready-to-win effect fails and ends in the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. . More specifically, the development failure image SIG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound of "chin" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 67(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 66, when the execution period of the blackout effect has passed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the effect symbol 70a returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect. The normal reach effect is resumed, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is resumed (see FIG. 67(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 66, when the central effect pattern 70a scrolled (updated and changed) at a low speed is temporarily stopped at "6", the output of a temporary stop sound is started from the audio output device 9, and the center The character of the production pattern 70a performs the production action (movement before stopping by shaking the head), and the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped with the reach-losing roll ("565"). Further, the output of normal reach BGM is stopped, but the audible output of fluctuating BGM is not restarted (see FIG. 67(f)).

After that, at timing T6 in FIG. 66, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 68(g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 66, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 68(h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 66, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display by the effect symbol 70a ("565") and the special symbol TZ ("565") is started. (See FIG. 68(i)).

After that, at timing T9 in FIG. 66, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the disappearance display of the icon TI started, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 68(j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 66, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, it becomes a customer waiting state and becomes a waiting period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed. A state specification command is sent. Thereafter, when a demonstration waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the receipt of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing the game to the player is started.

In this way, when the normal reach variation performance is executed, when the normal reach performance is started, the variation BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output, so that the normal reach performance is effectively livened up. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case of a customer waiting state after the losing normal reach fluctuation effect, the effect BGM (fluctuation BGM, normal reach BGM) is not output before the normal reach change effect ends, specifically, from the temporary stop of the three effect patterns 70a. Since it is in the state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the normal reach effect has ended or that it has been lost, and it is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that instead of stopping the output of the production BGM (fluctuation BGM, normal reach BGM) from the temporary stop of the three production patterns 70a, the temporary stop of the three production patterns 70a will audibly output the fluctuation BGM instead of the normal reach BGM. can be In this way, the player will not be extremely discouraged when the normal ready-to-win variation effect with the low expectation for the big win is lost.

(Concrete example of the case where the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends)
With reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, a specific example in which the variable effect is executed after the losing SPSP ready-to-win effect is completed will be described.

FIG. 69 is a timing chart when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, and FIGS. 70 to 71 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 66, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, three effect symbols 70a are scrolled (updated), and the special symbol TZ is updated (scrolled, switched). Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 69, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started in which the central effect pattern 70a is scrolled at a low speed while the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped with the same pattern, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started. is stopped (muted) and output of normal reach BGM is started.

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 69, when the dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the main display device 70 At this time, the promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 are started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the voice output device 9 produces a prompting sound “Press”. is output (see FIG. 70(a)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 69, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the development to the SP ready-to-win effect succeeds and the development success effect to suggest that the SP ready-to-win effect is executed is executed. be done. Specifically, the development success image HSG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound "You did it" is output from the voice output device 9 (see FIG. 70(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 69, when the execution period of the blackout effect has passed, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SP reach effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern 70a changes to a display mode of numbers only, and the left and right effect patterns are displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen in a state of being reduced from the normal size (see FIG. 70(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 69, when the execution period of the SP ready-to-win effect has passed, the display of the SPSP ready-to-win effect background image and the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM are started, and the execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. At this time, the three production patterns 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a state reduced from the normal size, and the first pending icon display area 70B is hidden together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 70(d)). .

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 69, when the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped in the final phase of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and the final effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the voice output device 9 prompts "press". A sound is output (see FIG. 70(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 69, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image HBG is displayed on the main display device 70 , and the failure sound of “Hey!” is output from the audio output device 9 . In addition, by temporarily stopping the central production pattern 70a at the upper left corner of the screen, the three production patterns 70a will be in a state of being temporarily stopped with the reach losing roll ("565") (Fig. 70 (f )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 69, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect has passed, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Specifically, a shielding image (for example, an eye-catching image including a model name, a model-specific character, etc.) that shields the background image, the production pattern 70a, etc. is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a is returned to the position before the start of the SP ready-to-win effect and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. Become. Also, the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 71(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 69, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 71(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 69, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display by the effect symbol 70a ("565") and the special symbol TZ ("565") is started. (See FIG. 71(i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 69, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI, the disappearing display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 71(j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 69, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first reserved number becomes "1" from "2" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 transfers to the effect control board 130. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 71 (k )reference).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 69 (during the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first retention number display area SA and the first sub first retention The display 83 becomes "1" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the drawing) on the first sub-variable display 81 starts from the beginning (turns off) (see FIG. 71(l)).

Also, the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the variable performance is started, the performance pattern 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, the special pattern TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variable BGM is resumed. (See FIG. 71(l)).

Although the SP reach fluctuation effect has been explained here, the same applies to the SP reach change effect. Playback of the normal reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the output of the normal reach BGM is resumed in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. SP reach BGM is output without doing.

In addition, although the SPSP reach variation effect has been described here, the SP reach variation effect is the same as the case where the SPSP reach change effect is lost. Then, a first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is executed, and when the first stop suggesting effect is completed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed. , the production pattern 70a returns to the normal size and the first mode, and the temporary stop display is performed.

Also, when the read-ahead zone effect is executed and the read-ahead zone background is displayed and the ready-to-reach state is reached, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed. It is the same as the case where the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect are executed in the state where the background image is displayed and the ready-to-win effect is executed, but the effect pattern 70a that is lost in the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is temporarily stopped. Then, a first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is executed, and when the first stop suggesting effect is completed, the normal background image ( For example, the horizontal scrolling of mode A (background image) is resumed, and the production pattern 70a returns to the normal size and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped.

Thus, in the first variation effect (normal reach variation effect) in which the blackout effect (suggestion effect) that suggests whether or not the SP reach effect is executed is executed, the reproduction of the normal reach BGM is continued during the blackout effect. After the blackout effect, the muted normal reach BGM is returned to audible output, and a blackout effect (suggestive effect) is performed to suggest whether or not the SP reach effect will be executed. In the executed second variation performance (SP/SPSP reach variation performance), reproduction of normal reach BGM is interrupted during blackout performance, and SP reach BGM is output in SP reach performance after blackout performance. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of voice control when executing the SP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the degree of freedom of voice control.

Also, when the SP reach effect is started during the display of the first background image (for example, the mode A background image which is the normal background image) or the second background image (look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal gaming state, usually The background image is changed to a third background image (SP ready-to-win background image) showing that the degree of expectation for big win is higher than the background image, and the production pattern 70a forming the ready-to-win state and temporarily stopping is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. do. When the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped due to failure, the background image is changed to the first background image (the normal background image is the mode A background image), and the three production patterns 70a are stopped and displayed in the normal size. It has become. Therefore, the performance effect of the SP ready-to-win performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect in which the display mode of the effect pattern 70a changes, the mode of the effect action (contents of action, period of action, etc.) of the hold icon HI and the icon TI does not change. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the SP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the icon TI is displayed while the hold icon HI is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, after the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, the display of the pending icon HI (normal display mode pending icon, special display mode pending icon) is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable performance will be executed again after the variable performance in which the SPSP ready-to-win performance has been executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the display of the pending icon HI (suspended icon in the normal display mode, pending icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is not executed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, while the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. However, the display of the special symbol TZ is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable display is being performed, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

Also, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, a first stop suggesting effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will end and that the effect pattern 70a will be stop-displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, the first stop suggesting effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return the display mode of the effect symbol 70a to the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the display mode of the production pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return from the SPSP reach background image to the mode A background image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change of the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI are displayed during the blackout effect, at least one of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI is hidden, and the display is resumed when the SP ready-to-win effect is started. may

In addition, when the effective period is generated during the blackout effect and the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the development success effect or the development failure effect is executed, but the effect period should not be generated. may In this case, the development success production or development failure production may be executed, or the development success production or development failure production may be returned to the normal reach production or developed to the SP reach production. good.

In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are kept displayed during execution of the SP ready-to-win performance, and the pending icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is kept displayed during execution of the SP ready-to-win performance. However, the pending icon HI may be hidden while the icon TI is displayed while the SP ready-to-win performance is being executed, and the pending icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden during the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance.

(Concrete example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed)
72 to 74, a specific example of the case where the jackpot SPSP ready-to-win variation effect is finished and the jackpot game is executed will be described.

FIG. 72 is a timing chart when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed, and FIGS. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T5 in FIG. 72 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T5 in FIG. 69, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T6 will be described.

First, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 72, when the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped in the final stage of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 are displayed. is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the voice output device 9 prompts "press". A sound is output (see FIG. 73(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 72, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game is executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (largely descend) to the performance position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. In addition, the success image SEF is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound "Quin kyuin" is output from the voice output device 9. FIG. In addition, by temporarily stopping the center production pattern 70a at the upper left corner of the screen, the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the big hit ("555") (Fig. 73 (f )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 72, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect has passed, the first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Specifically, a shielding image (an eye-catching image including the model name) that shields the background image, the production pattern 70a, and the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a is returned to the position before the start of the SP ready-to-win effect and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. Become. Also, the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 73(g)).

In addition, the second stop suggestion effect is started, which suggests that the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed when the jackpot comes out. Specifically, the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect pattern 70a and disappears, and the light emission display effect is repeated twice at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.75 seconds) (see FIG. 73(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 72, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 74(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 72, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the command at the time of stop, the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 stops. Further, along with the end of the second stop suggestion effect, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started. ”) is started (see FIG. 74(i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 72, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI, the disappearing display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 74(j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 72, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the main control board 110 transmits the opening designation command of the jackpot game to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 74(k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 72, after the performance control board 130 receives the command for specifying the opening of the jackpot game, the opening performance of the jackpot game is started when a predetermined period elapses. Specifically, an opening effect screen including characters "big hit" is displayed, and the right corner of the screen suggests that a game ball should be shot aiming at the right side area (big prize winning opening) of the game area 5a. A right hitting image UG is displayed.

In this way, in the variation performance of the big win, the display of the pending icon HI (suspended icon in the normal display mode, pending icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SP ready-to-win performance is not executed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance. On the other hand, it is hidden when the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, but the display of the special symbol TZ is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed after the SP ready-to-win production is executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable display is being performed, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game. It should be noted that, in the variation effect that becomes a big hit, even if the SP reach effect does not develop after the normal reach effect, the display of the hold icon HI (normal display mode hold icon, special display mode hold icon) is maintained. there is

In addition, when the SPSP ready-to-win performance for a big hit ends, a second stop suggesting effect (light-emitting display effect in which the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect pattern 70a and disappears) is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will end and that the big win effect pattern 70a will be stop-displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect time (0.75 seconds) for one time of the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect and the cumulative effect time (1.5 seconds) are the period ( 2 seconds or 3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect stand out, and to emphasize that the big win effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

Note that the effect mode of the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is such that the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect pattern 70a and disappears. The effect image EF may move from one end to the other end of the character image and disappear, or the effect image EF may move from one end to the other end of the character image and disappear.

In addition, although the cumulative effect time of the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is shorter than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the pending icon, the effect time of one light emitting display effect is, for example, By setting the duration to 2 seconds, the cumulative effect time may be longer than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the hold icon HI.

In addition, although the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the SPSP ready-to-win effect is finished, the hold icon HI may not be displayed again depending on the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect. Specifically, when the first SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, or when the second SPSP ready-to-win performance that results in a loss is executed, the holding icon HI is re-displayed after the first stop suggesting performance is executed, and a big win is achieved. When the second SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, the opening performance of the jackpot game is executed as it is without executing the first stop suggestion performance (display of the eye-catching image) or the redisplay of the holding icon HI. may

In addition, the pending icon HI is redisplayed after the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. The hold icon HI may be hidden again. In this case, after execution of the resurrection effect, the effect pattern 70a of the big win is temporarily stopped, and the pending icon may be displayed again, or after the resurrection effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a of the big win is displayed or suspended. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be executed as it is without redisplaying the icon HI.

In addition, when the stop time command can be normally received during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the reach-losing fluctuation production is longer than the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the big hit fluctuation production. However, when the command at the time of stop cannot be normally received in the big hit fluctuation production, the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the big hit fluctuation production is longer than the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the reach loss fluctuation production. It is designed to be longer. In addition, when the stop time command and the opening designation command cannot be normally received in the big hit fluctuation production, the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the big hit fluctuation production is longer than the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the reach loss fluctuation production. It's getting longer.

(Specific example of recovering from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
A specific example of recovering from a power failure that occurred during a variable presentation will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG.

FIG. 75 is a timing chart in the case of recovering from power failure that occurred during the variable effect, and FIGS. 76 to 78 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 75, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, three effect symbols 70a are scrolled (updated), and the special symbol TZ is updated (scrolled, switched). Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 76(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 75, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is interrupted, the main control board 110 performs the process at the time of power interruption, and the first special symbol display 60 and the like are displayed. The main information display 59 including, the sub information display 80 including the first sub-variation display, etc., the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, etc. are in a non-display state, and the game sound output from the audio output device 9 ( fluctuation BGM, etc.) are also in a non-output state (see FIG. 76(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 75, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, a reading screen (initial screen) including characters "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. From the main control board 110 in which the control state of the game has been restored to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption to the effect control board 130, a power ON command (here, the second power supply indicating that the special symbol is being displayed fluctuating) A recovery designation command, a first special symbol memory designation command, and a second special symbol memory designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is resumed from the state before the power was cut off, and the first special symbol reservation display is resumed. The first pending number "2" display at 63 is also resumed (see FIG. 76(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 75, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the power-on command, the above-described power restoration notification and various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) are initialized. As the operation (including the return operation) is started, information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 76(d)).

At this time, in the main display device 70 during the power recovery notification, the power recovery image displayed on the entire screen is set as the highest layer, and various effect images (background image according to the effect mode at the time of power recovery, The effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, which are the initial results, the number of reservations at the time of power restoration and the reservation icon HI according to the production mode, the number of reservations according to the number of reservations at the time of power restoration, etc.) are lower than the power restoration image. Image data for power restoration notification set in the layer is generated and displayed. At this time, the visual recognition of various effect images is restricted by the power restoration image, but the background image and the pending icon are in a state of effect operation, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position. Become. In addition, even if the hold icon HI is in the special display mode before the power failure occurs, it is set to the normal display mode (white icon), and the icon TI is not displayed even if it was displayed before the power failure. (see FIG. 76(d)).

In addition, in the sub information display 80 during the power restoration notification, the sub first variable display 81 and the sub second variable display 82 are in a state of stopped display without variable display, and the sub first holding display 83 and the sub The second pending display 84 displays the pending number (see FIG. 76(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 75 (during the power restoration notification), when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first reservation number becomes "3" and the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed as "3", and the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 77(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 75, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the winning command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 display "3". Become. In addition, additional display of the suspension icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode on the third display portion of the first suspension icon display area 70B by animation is started, but it is visually recognized by the power restoration image set in the upper layer. is regulated (see FIG. 77(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 75, after the additional display of the animation of the pending icon HI is finished, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the main control board 110 sends a stop time command (symbol) to the effect control board 130. confirmation command) is sent. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 77(g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 75, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the stop command, the power restoration notification ends, and various effect images whose visual recognition has been restricted by the power restoration image are displayed. (Background image according to the production mode at the time of power restoration, production pattern 70a and special pattern TZ that are the initial results at the time of power restoration, pending icon HI according to the current number of reservations and production mode, depending on the current number of reservations reserved numbers, etc.) become visible (see FIG. 78(h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 75, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reservation number becomes "2" from "3" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 transfers to the effect control board 130. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 78 (i )reference).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 75 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display The device 83 displays "2", and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 78(j)).

Also, the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect pattern 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, the special pattern TZ starts the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variable BGM is started. (See FIG. 78(j)).

Then, at timing T10 in FIG. 75 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icons HI ends, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). In addition, the scroll display (update change) of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 78(k)).

It should be noted that, when the production mode D (probability variation gaming state) is controlled at the time of power restoration and when the production mode F is controlled, the display mode of the production pattern 70a will be displayed in the fourth mode, but the production The number image of the pattern 70a becomes the initial production pattern "753" common to the case where the production mode A (normal game state) is controlled at the time of power restoration. In addition, when it is controlled to production mode D (probability variable gaming state) at the time of power restoration, the initial production pattern is set to "246" etc. so that it can be distinguished from the case where it is controlled to production mode A (normal game state) at the time of power restoration. can be

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the customer waiting state and the control state of the game is restored, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Therefore, the production control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command while the reading screen (initial screen) is being displayed, and is waiting for the execution of the variable production without notifying the power restoration (production pattern 70a) is displayed.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the jackpot game and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time until the next round designation command or ending designation command is output from the main control board 110. Therefore, after the loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power restoration notification is performed, and then the effect screen corresponding to the command is displayed.

Thus, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the main display device 70 is set in the upper layer. By generating image data in which the suspended icon displayed in the icon display area of the main display device 70 is set as a lower layer and displayed on the main display device 70, the suspended icon in the lower layer is restricted from being viewed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused after the power is restored. In addition, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, even if the visual recognition of the pending icon is restricted by the power restoration image, when a special symbol storage designation command indicating that the number of pending has increased is received, according to the increase Image data including a pending icon is generated. Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

Further, even when the visual recognition of the pending icon is restricted by the power restoration image, the pending icon and the background image perform the effect operation. Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

Also, even if the visibility of the hold icon is restricted by the power restoration image, if the number of holds increases, the hold icon will be additionally displayed (increased display) by animation. there is Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, when the power supply is restored, the display mode of the production pattern 70a is different between the case of being controlled to the first production mode (production mode A) and the case of being controlled to the second production mode (production modes D, F). However, the numerical image of the effect pattern 70a is designed to be common numerical information ("753"). Therefore, even if the display mode of the performance pattern differs depending on the performance mode after the power supply is restored, it is possible to easily grasp that the power supply is restored.

Also, in the first reservation display area (first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64) and second display reservation area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84) , a third reserved display area (a reserved display area of the main display device 70) in which the reserved display is easier to visually recognize than the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, although the display mode of the reserved display is not changed based on the result of prefetching. , it is possible to change the display mode of the pending display (holding icon HI) based on the result of prefetching. , than the restart timing of the suspension display (visible display of the suspension icon HI) in the third suspension display area (suspension display area of the main display device 70), the first suspension display area (first special symbol suspension display 63 , second special symbol reservation display 64) and the second reservation display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84). Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of pending games at an early timing while notifying that the power supply is being restored. Note that the timing of resuming the suspended display in the first suspended display area may be earlier than the timing of resuming the suspended display in the second suspended display area.

Further, the hold icon HI, which was displayed in the special display mode before the power failure occurred, is displayed in the normal display mode after the power is restored. Therefore, there is no need to back up and store information indicating that the pending icon was in the special display mode in the effect control board 130, and it is possible to avoid the hardware configuration of the effect control board 130 from becoming complicated. .

In addition, after the power supply is restored, the holding icon is visibly displayed after the variable display (blinking due to movement lighting of the LED) is resumed on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61). It's like Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, after the power restoration image is displayed, the initial actions (including the return actions) of various roles (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) perform effect actions at different timings for each role. It is designed to be executed in a manner similar to the case. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the initial action of various accessories has been executed due to the occurrence of the power restoration, thereby avoiding the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that it is a performance action.

Note that the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 do not perform variable display during the power restoration notification and are in a stopped display state, but during the power restoration notification ( After receiving the second power supply restoration designation command indicating that the special symbols are being variably displayed), the variable display may be performed, and the stop display may be performed when the stop command (symbol determination command) is received.

(Concrete example when the command at the start could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect)
A specific example of a case where the start command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG.

FIG. 79 is a timing chart when the command at start cannot be received normally during the look-ahead effect, and FIGS. 80 to 81 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 79, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are updated and fluctuated (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 80(a)).

Next, when the look-ahead zone effect is started at the timing of T1 in FIG. 79, the above-described zone effect is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a horizontally scrolled state, and the zone image ZG including the character image "ZONE" is displayed. Also, the volume of the fluctuating BGM is lowered and the output of the zone BGM is started (see FIG. 80(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 79, when the center effect pattern 70a that has been scrolled (updated and changed) is temporarily stopped, the output of a temporary stop sound is started from the voice output device 9, and the character of the center effect pattern 70a performs a production action (pre-stop action of shaking the head), and all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 80(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound stops, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol passes, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 A stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted to. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 79, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and stop display of the effect symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") is started ( See FIG. 80(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 80(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 79, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first reservation number becomes "1" from "2" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 transfers to the effect control board 130. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 81 (g )reference).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the command at the start, the pending display should be updated at the timing of T7 in FIG. Update, shift display of hold icon HI) and variable effects should be executed, but they are not executed. Therefore, the stop display period of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is extended, and the look-ahead effect performance that should be executed over two times of the variation performance from the current variation performance is not started. However, the horizontal scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the effect operation of the pending icon HI are continued even during the extended period of the stop display period of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. (See FIG. 81(h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 79, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. In addition, a losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 81(i)).

However, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ should be executed. will not be executed.

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 79, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reservation number changes from "1" to "0" and big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 transfers to the effect control board 130. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 81 (j )reference).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 79 (during the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first retention number display area SA and the sub-first retention The display 83 becomes "0", and the first sub-variation display 81 starts to display variation (blinking: represented by ⊙ in the figure) (see FIG. 81(k)).

Further, of the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the previous variable display of the special symbol is erased without animation, and the second pending icon HI is erased. The pending icon HI (blue icon) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol this time displayed on the display section is displayed in non-animation on the first display section. Then, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display portion starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started and the effect symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 81(k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 79 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the floating display of the production pattern 70a, the look-ahead effect to be executed over two fluctuation productions from the previous fluctuation production The effect is started with a delay of one time, and a blue effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 81(l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 79 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, an icon change effect at the time of start of variation is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started.

In this way, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start, the variable effect is not executed during the variable display of the special symbols to be executed in the predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect). Even so, a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the performance control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the time of start and the variable performance is not executed during the variable display of the special symbols to start the predetermined look-ahead performance (read-ahead effect performance), the special symbols are displayed. The start of a predetermined look-ahead performance is regulated during variable display, and when the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the special symbols to be executed next, the look-ahead regulated during the variable display of the special symbols. The performance is about to start. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but when the variable effect is not executed, the first look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed. However, the second look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a variable BGM (suggestive effect sound) is output during the execution of the variable effect (suggestive effect) for suggesting the result of the big hit determination, and the target variable effect that is the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect is executed. A zone BGM (advance performance sound) suggesting the possibility of execution of a special game is output from before, and the zone BGM is output even after the target variation performance is started, and when the zone BGM is being output. , the suggestive effect is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the look-ahead zone production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that while the look-ahead zone effect is being executed (while the zone BGM is being output), the volume of the variable BGM is reduced, but the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. can be

Also, even if the icon change effect executed over a plurality of times of the variable effect and the variable effect in which the look-ahead zone effect is started are not executed because the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start, the effect will be executed next. The icon change effect or the look-ahead zone effect may be started from the variation effect to be performed.

In addition, a look-ahead effect production is executed as a look-ahead production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. A look-ahead countdown performance may be executed in which a countdown sound is output), or a look-ahead chance performance is executed in which a so-called chance number (556, 667, etc. with a certain rule) is stopped and displayed for each variable performance. Alternatively, these three look-ahead effects may be executed.

(Concrete example when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed)
A specific example when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while the menu image is being displayed, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 82, the player is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed. At this time, the first special symbol display device 60 displays a failing special symbol, and the main display device 70 is horizontally scrolling the mode A background image (effect operation), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. is stop-displayed with the losing roll ("537") which is the stop result of the previous variable effect. Also, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is in a state of being stopped (muted) (see FIG. 83(a)).

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T1 in FIG. 82, the effective period of the menu operation starts, and the main display device 70 displays a plurality of selection items (game "Model description" item that displays the explanation about machine 1, "Production customization" item for customizing the production in the variable production, "Pachi log" item for log management linked with the mobile phone) is displayed (see FIG. 83(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. Processing at the time of power cut-off is performed, and the main information display device 59 including the first special symbol display device 60 is put into a non-display state. At this time, the display states of the sub-information display device 80, the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71 continue (see FIG. 83(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 82, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a checksum judgment is performed to determine whether or not the data in the game RWM area is damaged. A process for initializing the control state of the game is performed. Then, a power-on command (here, power-on designation command, first special symbol storage designation command, second special symbol storage designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 . In addition, information display on the main information display device 59 (display of the lost special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, etc.) is started (see FIG. 83(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 82, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the power ON command, the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 include the characters "NOW ROADING". A loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the information display on the sub-information display 80 is momentarily hidden, and the game sound (variable BGM, etc.) is not output from the audio output device 9 (FIG. 83(e)). reference).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 82, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the reading screen (initial screen) was displayed, the above-described power-on notification and the initial operation (return) of various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) (including operation) is started, and information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 83(f)).

At this time, on the main display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed in front of the mode A background image where the horizontal scrolling (effect operation) is started with the initial result ("135") when the power is turned on. , and "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB. Also, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, and muted output is started at the beginning of the fluctuating BGM (see FIG. 83(f)).

Note that even when the power supply restoration designation command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ displayed on the main display device 70 are the initial numbers ("753") at the time of power supply restoration. Except for the fact that the power-on notification sound is not output, the operation is basically the same as when the power-on designation command is received.

Also, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the power-on command is basically received while the menu image MG is being displayed. The same as in the case of

Thus, the command received by the effect control board 130 from the main control board 110 while the menu image MG is being displayed on the main display device 70 is the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command). In this case, the menu image is rendered invisible on the main display device 70, and an image (reading screen, etc.) corresponding to the power-on command is displayed. Therefore, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 can be smoothly performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to shoot the game ball by transmitting the launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. By transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of is started, the game ball may be launched after the game becomes ready for play.

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on the payout request from the machine, but after the game progress control is started and the game becomes playable, the game ball is issued based on the payout request from the ball lending machine. It may be possible to pay out (ball lending).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) has an unpaid amount. Although the number of payout balls data does not remain, a backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). If the unpaid ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the unpaid ball number data can be used even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. It may be possible to pay out game balls based on

Further, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the game area 5a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a prize ball (award value) is given based on the satisfaction of the award conditions (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening). Balls may be managed as data, and winning ball data may be given (added to the held ball data).

Also, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during the variable effect, the zone image of one of the look-ahead zone effects is displayed on the upper and/or lower side of the screen so as to traverse the screen, and the image of the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed. It is preferable to display the zone image on the left and/or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. In this way, the two look-ahead zone effects can be made compatible, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed as the jackpot announcement effect, but instead of the blackout effect, the whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of presentation should be the same as the blackout presentation.

Also, in the present embodiment, the normal game state and the specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) were basically the same execution mode of the variable production, for example, the previous stage production in the normal game state Later stage production (case of pre-reach production and reach production, case of normal reach production and SP reach production, case of SP reach production and SP reach production, case of pre-reach production and temporary stop of production pattern, reach production and production pattern 70a during the temporary stop, etc.), the first information (information suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, information on the execution of a special game, etc.) advantageous to the player is notified during the execution of the latter stage performance of the variable performance. Second information different from the first information (additional information of songs selectable by operating the cross key 19, mission achievement status, etc.) etc.) may be notified. In addition, as a variable performance consisting of the front stage performance and the rear stage performance in the normal game state, the case where the common rear stage performance is executed after the first front stage performance is executed, and the case where the second front stage performance different from the first front stage performance is executed. A common post-stage effect may be executed, and information relating to the execution of the special game may be reported in the common post-stage effect executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, a conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, along with executing the variable display of the special symbols according to the determination result of the determination information, there was one that executed the variable performance by the performance symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols ( For example, see JP-A-2018-118109). However, in such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the game presentation, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation, the effect in the variable effect Variable display of the pattern in a predetermined mode (scroll display after pre-variation operation (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start of the frame update of the image control unit at which the variable display of the effect pattern in a predetermined mode is started. The difference is that the timer interrupt period (4ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is the frame update period (33ms ) may not be included in

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and after the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the variation A variable display (scroll display after pre-variation operation (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) of the production pattern in the production is started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the cycle variation The variable display (updated variation) of the special symbols is started at a timing different from the start timing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started. Although it is inconsistent, the timer interrupt period (4ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33ms) of the image control unit in which the fluctuation display of the special symbols is started. It may be

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the cycle variation After the first display change is started, the variable display (updated change) of the special symbols is started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , Hold display according to the hold storage stored in the storage means (hold icon and hold number on main display device 70, LED hold display on sub first hold display 83 and sub second hold display 84) It is possible to reduce the reserved display according to the decrease of the reserved storage, and the reduced display of the reserved display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. . By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The “different timing” here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the decrease display of the hold display is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt (4ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33ms) of the image controller at which the decrease display of the pending display is started. may be

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , Hold display (display of hold icon HI and hold number on main display device 70, hold on sub-first hold display 83 and sub-second hold display 84) according to the hold storage stored in the storage means and displaying the reserved display decrementing in response to the decrementing of the reserved storage, such that the decrementing display of the reserved display begins after a first display change in the cycle variation is initiated. It has become. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , it is possible to additionally display a pending display (holding icon HI) according to an increase in the pending memory, and to shift display and decrease the pending display (change to the icon TI) according to a decrease in the pending memory. The shift display of the hold display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The “different timing” here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the shift display of the hold display is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the shift display of the hold display is started. It may be

◇ As the eighth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , it is possible to additionally display a pending display (holding icon HI) according to an increase in the pending memory, and to shift display and decrease the pending display (change to the icon TI) according to a decrease in the pending memory. There is, and after the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbol ends, the shift display of the pending display ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , additionally displaying a pending display (holding icon HI) according to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting the pending display according to a decrease in the pending memory and displaying it as a corresponding display (the icon TI). , and the shift display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The “different timing” here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the shift display of the hold display is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the shift display of the hold display is started. may be

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. and additionally displaying a pending display (holding icon HI) in accordance with an increase in the reserved memory, and shifting the holding display according to a decrease in the reserved memory and displaying it as a corresponding display (the icon TI). It is possible that the shift display ends after the first display change in the cycle variation has ended. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As the eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variable start sound , temporary stop sound, etc.) can be audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the audible output of a predetermined game sound is started. may not be included in

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stop-displayed, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and audibly outputs effect BGM (variation BGM) during the execution of the variable effect. , and the audible output of the effect BGM is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the audible output of the effect BGM is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4MS) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33ms) of the image control unit in which the audible output of the effect BGM is started. It may be

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the background image displayed in the background of the effect symbol is displayed (horizontal scroll, scene change, etc.), and the effect operation of the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation (at the start of display of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on). there is By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the "different timing" here means that the timer interrupt start timing of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the frame update start timing of the image control section at which the background image effect operation is started are different. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33ms) of the image control unit in which the background image rendering operation is started. It may be

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the background image displayed in the background of the effect symbol is displayed (horizontal scroll, scene change, etc.), and before the start of the first cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbols (at the start of display of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on), the effect operation of the background image is performed. ing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol is in a predetermined mode at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation. is displayed (stop display, temporary stop display). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board that ends the cycle variation and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit that displays the effect symbols in a predetermined manner. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined manner. It may be

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and before the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbol ends, The production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As the 17th configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the cycle variation The special symbols are stop-displayed at a timing different from the end timing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board that ends the cycle variation and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit that stops and displays the special symbols do not match. However, even if the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. good.

◆ As the eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , a pending display (holding icon HI) corresponding to the pending memory stored in the storage means can be effected (shaking motion, rotating motion) during execution of the variable effect, and the special symbol is changed. Even after the end of the last cycle variation in the display, the effect operation of the pending display is continued. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , it is possible to display a corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the determination information for which the determination has been performed, and to disappear and display the corresponding display at a predetermined timing; The disappearance display of the correspondence display ends at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation of . By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the disappearance display of the corresponding display is terminated. It may be

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , it is possible to display a corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the determination information for which the determination has been performed, and to disappear and display the corresponding display at a predetermined timing; After the cycle variation of is finished, disappearance display of the corresponding display is finished. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variable start sound , temporary stop sound, etc.) can be audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound that started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol is the end of the cycle variation It is possible to end at a timing different from the timing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound ends. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation ends is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the audible output of the predetermined game sound ends. may not be included in

◆ As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (such as a temporary stop sound) during the execution of the variable effect. It is possible to audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol can be terminated before the cycle variation ends. It is possible. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and audibly outputs a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) during the execution of the variable effect. The predetermined game sound can be continuously audibly output even after the end of the last cycle variation (during stop display) in the variable display of the special symbols. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As the 24th configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the background image displayed in the background of the effect symbol is displayed during the execution of the variable effect It is possible to perform the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.), and the effect operation of the background image continues even after the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols is completed (during stop display). It is supposed to be done. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be performed. The variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the winning order of the game balls to the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47 .

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the small winning game is not executed because there is no small winning as a result of the big winning determination. Then, regardless of the set value, it is determined as a small hit with the same first probability (for example, 1/300). Even if it is a value, it may be determined as a small hit with the same second probability (for example, 1/7). In this case, a specific area is provided inside the first variable winning portion 49, and when the game ball that has won the first big winning opening 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area, a big winning game is executed. It is good also as +2 types of game machines.

Also, in the case of a so-called 1 type + 2 type game machine, it is assumed to be shifted to the normal game state or the time saving game state after the jackpot game, and the jackpot game based on the winning to the first start port 45 (through the small winning game ) is executed, it shall be shifted to the normal game state and the time-saving game state at a ratio of 1: 1, and the jackpot game based on the winning to the second start port 47 (including the small winning game via) is executed, it is preferable to shift to the time-saving game state with a probability of 100%. In this case, when the transition to the time-saving game state is made after the jackpot game based on the winning to the first start port 45 is completed, the number of times of time-saving is set to one, and the jackpot game based on the winning to the second start port 47 is started. When the time-saving game state is entered after the end of the game, the number of times of time-saving may be set to 5 times and 10 times at a ratio of 1:1.

Also, in the case of a so-called 1 type + 2 type game machine, if it is determined to be a small hit in the look-ahead determination (preliminary determination) during the normal game state, the final display mode of the icon in the icon change effect is the big win game. The rainbow icon that confirms the execution is not determined, and if it is determined to be a small hit in the look-ahead determination (pre-determination) during the time-saving game state, the rainbow icon will be determined as the final display mode of the icon change effect. can be

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when winning symbols are stopped and displayed on an active line by a game using medals (game media) (giving conditions are satisfied), a predetermined amount is reached. It can also be used for a reel-type game machine (so-called slot machine) capable of awarding a player with a prize medal (prize medal data). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 Normal figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 First big winning port 56 Second big winning port 70 Main display device 71 Sub display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means,
The main control means is
Determination means for determining determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as pending storage;
A variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination,
The variable display means is
Cycle variation is performed a plurality of times with one cycle of changing to a plurality of display modes as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop time ,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol,
It is possible to additionally display a reserved display according to an increase in the reserved memory, and shift display and decrease the reserved display according to a decrease in the reserved memory,
The additional display time when additionally displaying the pending display during the customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed is shorter than the length of the cycle period in the cycle fluctuation,
After the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols is started, the shift display of the pending display and the variable display of the effect symbols are started,
After the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the shift display of the pending display is completed ,
The game machine is characterized in that the performance symbols are stop-displayed at a timing after the end of the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols and before the stop time of the special symbols elapses .

Images